0% found this document useful (0 votes)

436 views414 pages

APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN

Uploaded by

myo htet htoo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

436 views414 pages

APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN

Uploaded by

myo htet htoo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 414

APM30H (Ver.

Installation Guide

Issue 02
Date 2021-08-13

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2021. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide Contents

Contents

1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide.................................................................................... 1

1.1 Changes in APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide........................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Requirements for Site Selection......................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Installation Preparations....................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 Documents............................................................................................................................................................................. 6
1.3.2 Tools and Instruments........................................................................................................................................................ 7
1.3.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel............................................................................................................................... 9
1.4 Installation Scenarios............................................................................................................................................................. 9
1.5 Unpacking Check.................................................................................................................................................................. 21
1.6 Obtaining an ESN................................................................................................................................................................. 23
1.7 Installation Clearance Requirements............................................................................................................................. 27
1.8 Installation Process............................................................................................................................................................... 32
1.9 Installing a Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................................. 33
1.9.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...................................................................................................................33
1.9.1.1 Installing a Base............................................................................................................................................................. 33
1.9.1.2 Installing a Cabinet on a Base................................................................................................................................... 47
1.9.1.3 Stacking Two Cabinets................................................................................................................................................. 50
1.9.2 Installing a Cabinet on a Pole....................................................................................................................................... 52
1.9.3 Installing a Cabinet on a Wall...................................................................................................................................... 57
1.10 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable............................................................................................63
1.11 Installing BBU 0.................................................................................................................................................................. 73
1.11.1 Installing a BBU3900/BBU3910..................................................................................................................................73
1.12 Installing the SLPU as a Trunk Signal Protection Unit.......................................................................................... 78
1.13 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables......................................................................................................... 80
1.13.1 Installing BBU 1............................................................................................................................................................... 80
1.13.1.1 Installing a BBU5900.................................................................................................................................................. 80
1.13.1.2 Installing Boards in a BBU5900.............................................................................................................................. 89
1.13.2 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..........................................................................103
1.13.3 Installing the SOU........................................................................................................................................................ 108
1.13.4 Installing the AC Heater............................................................................................................................................. 111
1.13.5 Installing an EMUA/EMUB........................................................................................................................................ 115
1.13.6 Installing a PSU............................................................................................................................................................. 126
1.13.7 Installing a DCDU-12B................................................................................................................................................ 127

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide Contents

1.13.8 Installing a DCDU16D................................................................................................................................................. 138

1.13.9 Installing an EPU02D/EPU02D-02.......................................................................................................................... 145
1.13.10 Installing an EPU02B/EPU02S................................................................................................................................ 157
1.13.11 Installing an EPU02S-02.......................................................................................................................................... 168
1.13.12 Installing the GPS Surge Protector....................................................................................................................... 177
1.13.13 Installing the DDF...................................................................................................................................................... 181
1.13.14 Installing Storage Batteries..................................................................................................................................... 184
1.13.14.1 Installing Lithium Batteries in a BBC5200T-L................................................................................................184
1.13.14.2 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T............................................................................. 190
1.13.14.3 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T............................................................................. 193
1.13.14.4 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T............................................................................ 198
1.13.15 Installing the ODM06D............................................................................................................................................ 200
1.13.15.1 Installing the ODM06D on a Mounting Frame............................................................................................ 200
1.13.15.2 Installing the ODM06D on a Pole.....................................................................................................................209
1.13.15.3 Installing a PGND Cable for an ODM06D......................................................................................................211
1.13.16 Installing an HAU01A-01.........................................................................................................................................213
1.13.16.1 Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS700D.................................................................................................... 213
1.13.16.2 Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS300D.................................................................................................... 218
1.14 Installing Cables............................................................................................................................................................... 222
1.14.1 Cabling Requirements................................................................................................................................................. 222
1.14.2 Cable Holes in a Cabinet............................................................................................................................................231
1.14.3 Installing Power Cables.............................................................................................................................................. 237
1.14.3.1 Installing an APM30H Input Power Cable........................................................................................................ 237
1.14.3.2 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H......................................................................240
1.14.3.3 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200T-L (APM:BBC = 1:1)............................. 243
1.14.3.4 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200T-L Cabinets (APM:BBC = 1:2)........... 246
1.14.3.5 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:1)....... 251
1.14.3.6 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts (APM:IBBS = 1:2).... 256
1.14.3.7 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts (APM:IBBS = 1:2)......... 263
1.14.3.8 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D or IBBS700T (APM:IBBS = 1:1)....... 270
1.14.3.9 Installing BBU Power Cables................................................................................................................................. 274
1.14.3.10 Installing RRU Power Cables...............................................................................................................................278
1.14.3.10.1 Installing RRU Power Cables in a -48 V Scenario.................................................................................... 278
1.14.3.10.2 Installing RRU Power Cables and ODM06D Power Cables...................................................................301
1.14.3.10.3 Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 V Scenario.................................................................................... 308
1.14.3.10.4 Installing RRU Power Cables (RRU Power Consumption > 800 W, with an ODM03D)..............318
1.14.4 Installing Transmission Cables................................................................................................................................. 321
1.14.4.1 Installing an E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable.................................................................................... 322
1.14.4.2 Installing an E1/T1 Cable....................................................................................................................................... 323
1.14.4.3 Installing an FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable.................................................................................... 325
1.14.4.4 Installing an FE/GE Ethernet Cable..................................................................................................................... 327
1.14.4.5 Installing an FE/GE Optical Fiber.........................................................................................................................332

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide Contents

1.14.5 Installing Signal Cables...............................................................................................................................................336

1.14.5.1 Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H........................................................................ 336
1.14.5.2 Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L and Its Expansion Scenario.............................................................338
1.14.5.3 Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L Cabinets and Its Expansion Scenario.......................................... 342
1.14.5.4 Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T....................................................................................................................................................................................... 348
1.14.5.5 Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H........................................................................................................................................................................................ 351
1.14.5.6 Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts Expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1
TMC11H........................................................................................................................................................................................ 355
1.14.5.7 Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T....................................................................................................................................................................................... 360
1.14.5.8 (Optional) Installing BBU Interconnection Signal Cables........................................................................... 363
1.14.5.9 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable................................................................................................................................376
1.14.5.10 Installing an ODM06D Surge Protection Alarm Cable.............................................................................. 377
1.14.6 Installing CPRI Optical Fibers for 12 or Fewer RRUs........................................................................................ 378
1.14.7 Installing CPRI Optical Fibers for More Than 12 RRUs....................................................................................383
1.15 Installation Checklist....................................................................................................................................................... 391
1.16 Powering On a Base Station........................................................................................................................................ 394
1.17 Follow-up Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 402
1.17.1 Sealing Cable Outlets.................................................................................................................................................. 402
1.17.2 Repainting....................................................................................................................................................................... 407

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Overview
This document provides the procedures for installing the cabinet, boards, modules,
and cables when the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D). It also provides
checklists for hardware installation. The APM30H (Ver.D) can be configured with
the BBU3910, BBU3900, or BBU5900.

The RF modules for distributed base stations in this document include RRUs and
AAUs. The application scenarios, power distribution principles, cable connections,
and cable installation of the RRUs and AAUs are the same. The following uses the
RRUs as an example.

The exteriors of components or cables in this document are for reference only. The
actual exteriors may be different.

NOTE

● Unless otherwise specified, in this document, LTE and eNodeB always include FDD, NB-IoT,
and TDD. In scenarios where they need to be distinguished, LTE FDD, LTE NB-IoT, and LTE
TDD are used. The same rules apply to eNodeB.
● Unless otherwise specified, in this document, NR and gNodeB always include FDD and TDD.
In scenarios where they need to be distinguished, NR FDD and NR TDD are used. The same
rules apply to gNodeB.
● In this document, "G" is short for GSM, "U" for UMTS, "L" for LTE FDD, "T" for LTE TDD, "M"
for LTE NB-IoT, and "N" for NR. In addition, "N (FDD)" is short for NR FDD and "N (TDD)" is
short for NR TDD.
● For details about the BBU in the LampSite solution, see this document. For details about the
RHUB and pRRU in the LampSite solution, see LampSite Installation Guide.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Solution Version Product Version

3900 series base stations SRAN12.1 and later V100R012C10 and later

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Unless otherwise specified, cabinets, components, and RATs involved in this

document are supported in V100R008C00 and later versions. The following table
lists the special cases.

Item Solution Version Product Version

● EPU02D SRAN12.1/GBSS19.1/ V100R012C10 and later

● EPU02D-02 RAN19.1/eRAN12.1/
eRAN TDD 12.1 and later

DCDU16D SRAN15.1/GBSS21.1/ V100R015C10 and later

RAN21.1/eRAN15.1/
eRAN TDD 15.1 and later

EPU02S SRAN16.0/GBSS22.0/ V100R016C00 and later

RAN22.0/eRAN16.0/
eRAN TDD 16.0 and later

● EPU02B SRAN16.1/GBSS22.1/ V100R016C10 and later

● EPU02S-02 RAN22.1/eRAN16.1/
eRAN TDD 16.1 and later

BBC5200T-L SRAN15.1/GBSS21.1/ V100R015C10 and later

RAN21.1/eRAN15.1/
eRAN TDD 15.1 and later

Intended Audience
This document is intended for base station installation engineers.

Organization
1.1 Changes in APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide
This section describes the changes in APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide.
1.2 Requirements for Site Selection
Sites provided by Huawei must be deployed in places that meet specified
requirements.
1.3 Installation Preparations
1.4 Installation Scenarios
This section describes the installation scenarios of the APM30H (Ver.D).
1.5 Unpacking Check
This chapter describes how to unpack the delivered equipment, components, or
parts and check whether all the materials are included and intact.
1.6 Obtaining an ESN
The electronic serial number (ESN) is used to identify an NE. Record the ESN of
the base station before the installation for future commissioning.
1.7 Installation Clearance Requirements
This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet. The
clearances are reserved for cable layout and future maintenance.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1.8 Installation Process

The DBS site installation process includes installing cabinets, installing
components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check,
and subsequent operations.
1.9 Installing a Cabinet
This section describes the procedures for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor, a
pole, and a wall. The same procedure is used for installing the following cabinets
on a concrete floor, a pole, and a wall: APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E), APM30H
(Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.D)/
TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses an APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.
1.10 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable
A PGND cable connects the ground screw in a cabinet to an external ground bar
to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects
ground screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between
the cabinets.
1.11 Installing BBU 0
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing BBU 0. BBU 0
can be a BBU3900/BBU3910.
1.12 Installing the SLPU as a Trunk Signal Protection Unit
When an outdoor base station transmits signals through an E1/T1 or FE/GE port,
you need to install the SLPU as a trunk signal protection unit.
1.13 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables
This section describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their
cables onsite.
1.14 Installing Cables
This section describes external cables and cables for mandatory components.
1.15 Installation Checklist
This section describes how to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cables after the installation is complete.
1.16 Powering On a Base Station
This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the
power supply to the components in a cabinet.
1.17 Follow-up Procedure
This section describes the operations that need to be performed after the
installation, which include sealing the cable outlets on the base of the cabinet and
repainting the cabinet.

1.1 Changes in APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

This section describes the changes in APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide.

02 (2021-08-13)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with Issue 01 (2020-01-20), this issue does not include any new topics
or exclude any topics.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Compared with Issue 01 (2020-01-20), this issue includes the following changes.

Topic Change Description

● 1.7 Installation Clearance Added descriptions of the BBC5200T-L

Requirements cabinet and its cables.
● 1.9.1.1 Installing a Base
● 1.10 Installing a PGND Cable and
an Equipotential Cable
● 1.13.14.1 Installing Lithium
Batteries in a BBC5200T-L
● 1.14.3.3 Installing Power Cables
from the APM30H to the
BBC5200T-L (APM:BBC = 1:1)
● 1.14.3.4 Installing Power Cables
from the APM30H to the
BBC5200T-L Cabinets (APM:BBC =
1:2)
● 1.14.5.2 Scenario: 1 APM30H+1
BBC5200T-L and Its Expansion
Scenario
● 1.14.5.3 Scenario: 1 APM30H+2
BBC5200T-L Cabinets and Its
Expansion Scenario

01 (2020-01-20)
This is the first commercial release.
This document is separated from the DBS3900 Installation Guide document and its
content derives from the sections "Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is
Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D)" and "Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is
Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs."
Compared with the sections "Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
an APM30H (Ver.D)" and "Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors
and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs" in DBS3900 Installation
Guide of Issue 12 (2018-12-30), this issue includes the following new topics:
● 1.13.10 Installing an EPU02B/EPU02S
● 1.13.11 Installing an EPU02S-02
● 1.13.8 Installing a DCDU16D
Compared with the sections "Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
an APM30H (Ver.D)" and "Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors
and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs" in DBS3900 Installation
Guide of Issue 12 (2018-12-30), this issue includes the following changes.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Topic Change Description

● 1.14.3.10.3 Installing RRU Power Added the descriptions of EPU02B,

Cables in a -57 V Scenario EPU02S-02, and EPU02S.

● 1.14.3.10.1 Installing RRU Power Added the descriptions of DCDU16D

Cables in a -48 V Scenario and its power cables.

Compared with the sections "Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
an APM30H (Ver.D)" and "Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors
and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs" in DBS3900 Installation
Guide of Issue 12 (2018-12-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

1.2 Requirements for Site Selection

Sites provided by Huawei must be deployed in places that meet specified
requirements.

Requirements for Outdoor Base Stations

● Sites must be free from dust, excessive heat, harmful gases, and explosive
substances. The power voltage at the site must be stable.
● Sites must be located at a place where violent shakes or strong noises are
unlikely to occur.
● Sites must be far away from substations, industrial boilers, and heating
boilers.
● Sites must be far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar stations, or
other interference sources. The interference field strength cannot exceed the
shielding specifications of the base station for useless radiation.
● Sites must be far away from pollution sources. If a site has to be constructed
near a pollution source, the site must be constructed in the upwind direction.
– Sites must be located at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) away from heavy pollution
sources, such as a smelting plant or a coal mine.
– Sites must be located at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from medium
pollution sources such as a chemical plant, a rubber plant, or an
electroplating plant.
– Sites must be located at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) away from light pollution
sources such as a food product factory or a leather product factory.
● Air intake vents of the communication equipment must be located far away
from the outlets of sewer pipes, septic tanks, or sewage disposal pools. Ensure
that the equipment is in positive pressure state and is free from corrosive
gases. Otherwise, electronic components and circuit boards may be corroded.

Requirements for Indoor Base Stations

● Equipment rooms for indoor base stations cannot be constructed in livestock
rooms or fertilizer warehouses. If an equipment room has to be located near a
livestock house or a fertilizer warehouse, it must be located in the upwind
direction.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● It is recommended that the equipment room of an indoor site be located in a

floor higher than the second. If this requirement cannot be met, the ground
height of the equipment room must be 600 mm (23.62 in.) higher than the
maximum flood level in the local history.
● The following recommendations are provided to optimize equipment rooms
that are sensitive to noise:
– Equipment is installed as far as possible from human activity areas.
– Equipment rooms are not located adjacent to bedrooms of residents. If an
equipment room has to be adjacent to bedrooms of residents, the
equipment room and the bedrooms should be separated by at least two
walls.
– Equipment is installed 5 m (16.4 ft) farther from doors and windows.
– The front doors of equipment are facing towards a direction that people
rarely pass by.
– The thickness of the floor in the equipment room is greater than or equal
to 150 mm (5.91 in.).
– Rubber pads are placed under equipment to reduce noise and solid-borne
sound.
– It is recommended that sound-absorbing materials be stuck to
appropriate positions on walls in the equipment room to reduce noise.

1.3 Installation Preparations

This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the
installation. It also specifies the skills that the onsite personnel must have.

1.3.1 Documents
During the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the
following documents:

● Safety Information
● Installation Reference
● 3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Model Description
● 3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Component Description
● 3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Cables
● RFU Hardware Description
● BBU5900 Hardware Description
● BBU5900A Hardware Description
● BBU3900 and BBU3910 Hardware Description
● BBU3910A Hardware Description
● BBU3910C Hardware Description

For details about how to install the auxiliary equipment, see the related
installation guide of the auxiliary equipment. For example, for details about how
to install an EMUB, see EMUB User Guide.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

For details about the hardware description of a cabinet or a rack, see the
corresponding hardware description. For example, for the hardware description of
the APM5930, see APM5930 Hardware Description.
For details about how to install an RRU, see the corresponding RRU installation
guide. For example, for details about how to install an RRU5502, see RRU5502
Installation Guide.
For details about the hardware description of an RRU, see the corresponding RRU
hardware description. For example, for the hardware description of the RRU5502,
see RRU5502 Hardware Description.

1.3.2 Tools and Instruments

The following primary and auxiliary installation tools must be ready before the
installation.

Primary Installation Tools

The primary installation tools must be provided for onsite installation, such as
tools for measuring dimensions, preparing cables, and fastening, as listed in Table
1-1.

Table 1-1 Primary installation tools

Multi-purpose wire Torque screwdriver (0.4 Torque wrench (1 N·m to
stripper (for stripping N·m to 15 N·m or 3.54 50 N·m or 8.85 lbf·in. to
wires, cutting wires, and lbf·in. to 132.76 lbf·in.) 442.54 lbf·in.)
crimping OT terminals)

Size: 10 mm (0.39 in.),

13 mm (0.51 in.), 14 mm
3 mm (0.12 in.) and 5 (0.55 in.), 16 mm (0.63
mm (0.20 in.) in.), 17 mm (0.67 in.), 18
mm (0.71 in.), 19 mm
(0.75 in.), 21 mm (0.83
3 mm (0.12 in.) and 5 in.), 22 mm (0.87 in.),
mm (0.20 in.) and 32 mm (1.26 in.)

M2.5 to M6

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Heat gun Measuring tape Torque socket (1.2 N·m

to 45 N·m or 10.62 lbf·in.
to 398.28 lbf·in.)

Size: 10 mm (0.39 in.),

13 mm (0.51 in.), 14 mm
(0.55 in.), 16 mm (0.63
in.), 17 mm (0.67 in.), 18
mm (0.71 in.), 19 mm
(0.75 in.), 21 mm (0.83
in.), 22 mm (0.87 in.),
and 32 mm (1.26 in.)

Level Hammer drill (Φ12, Φ14, Hex key

Φ16, and Φ18)

Auxiliary Installation Tools

The auxiliary installation tools provide protection or facilitate the installation, as
listed in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Auxiliary installation tools

Protective gloves ESD gloves Utility knife

Diagonal pliers Multimeter Vacuum cleaner

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Marker (diameter ≤ 10 Rubber mallet -

mm or 0.39 in.)

1.3.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel

Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation,
onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety
precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following:
● The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be
familiar with the proper installation and operation methods.
● The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and
installation environment. In most cases, three to five people are required.

1.4 Installation Scenarios

This section describes the installation scenarios of the APM30H (Ver.D).

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE

APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.

Single- or dual-mode base station

An APM30H can supply power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. When a base station is
configured with 7 to 12 RRUs, another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H.
When a base station is configured with 13 to 15 RRUs, an ODM and an OFD must
be configured.
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which
is installed in the APM30H.
When backup power is not required in a single- or dual-mode base station, the
cabinet configurations of the base station with different requirements on space for
customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-1 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when

backup power is not required

When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when

backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/BBC5200T-Ls
are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-3 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when

backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts/BBC5200T-Ls are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio

When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and

APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the
cabinet configurations of the base station with different requirements on space for
customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when

backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially
configured on a 1:1 ratio

The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different backup power requirements, requirements on space for
customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

Table 1-3 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Power Backup Space Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power for Configur
Require Custom ation
ment er
Equipm
ent

110 V AC or No ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H

220 V AC backup
power ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

≤4U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power for Configur
Require Custom ation
ment er
Equipm
ent

≤ 15 U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

+1 TMC11H

≤ 15 U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+ 1 OFD

APM30H ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/

s and IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L
IBBS200
Ds/ ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
Ts/ BBC5200T-L
BBC520 ≤4U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
0T-Ls +1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
initially BBC5200T-L
configur
ed on a ≤4U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
1:1 ratio +1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
BBC5200T-L+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L

≤ 15 U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L+1 ODM
+1 OFD

● APM ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs ● 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/

30Hs IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/
and IBBS300Ts/BBC5200T-Ls
IBBS2 ● 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/
00Ds/ IBBS700T
IBBS2
00Ts/ ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs ● 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H
IBBS3 + 2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
00Ds/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T/
IBBS3 BBC5200T-L
00Ts ● 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
initial IBBS700D/IBBS700T
ly
confi
gured

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power for Configur
Require Custom ation
ment er
Equipm
ent

on a ≤4U ≤ 12 RRUs ● 1 APM30H (with one

1:2 DCDU)+2 IBBS200Ds/
ratio IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/
● APM IBBS300Ts/BBC5200T-Ls
30Hs ● 1 APM30H (with one
and DCDU)+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS7 IBBS700T
00Ds/
IBBS7 ≤4U ≤ 15 RRUs ● 1 APM30H (with one
00Ts DCDU)+2 IBBS200Ds/
initial IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/
ly IBBS300Ts/BBC5200T-Ls+1
confi ODM+1 OFD
gured ● 1 APM30H (with one
on a DCDU)+1 IBBS700D/
1:1 IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
ratio
≤ 15 U ≤ 12 RRUs ● 1 APM30H (with one
DCDU)+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls
● 1 APM30H (with one
DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤ 15 U ≤ 15 RRUs ● 1 APM30H (with one

DCDU)+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls+1 ODM+1
OFD
● 1 APM30H (with one
DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
ODM+1 OFD

NOTE

When APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio and more
than six RRUs are configured, ensure that two or more 100 Ah battery packs are configured
in each IBBS200D/IBBS200T to avoid overcurrent of a single battery pack.

Triple- or quadruple-mode base station

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the
BBUs are installed as follows:
● If two BBUs are configured during initial deployment, both the BBUs are
installed in an APM30H, and transmission equipment is installed in a
TMC11H.
● If there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H during capacity expansion,
the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a
TMC11H.
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the
position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When backup power is not required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station,
the cabinet configurations of the base station with different requirements on
space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. In the following
figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and
illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.

Figure 1-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

when backup power is not required

When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and

APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/BBC5200T-Ls are initially configured on a 1:1
ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different requirements on
space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. In the following
figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and
illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and

APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/BBC5200T-Ls are
initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station
with different requirements on space for customer equipment are shown in the
following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of
new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/BBC5200T-Ls are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio

When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and

APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts/BBC5200T-Ls are initially configured on a 1:1
ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different requirements on
space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode

base station with different backup power requirements, requirements on space for
customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

Table 1-4 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration
Supply Power Custome Configur
Require r ation
ment Equipme
nt

110 V AC No ≤2U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

or 220 V backup +1 ODM+1 OFD
AC power
≤ 13 U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+ 1 OFD

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power Custome Configur
Require r ation
ment Equipme
nt

APM30Hs ≤2U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

and +1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
IBBS200D IBBS300D/IBBS300T/
s/ BBC5200T-L+1 ODM+1 OFD
IBBS200T
s/ ≤ 13 U ≤ 15 RRUs 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
BBC5200 +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
T-Ls IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L+1 ODM
initially +1 OFD
configure
d on a
1:1 ratio

● APM3 ≤2U ≤ 15 RRUs ● 1 APM30H (with one

0Hs DCDU)+2 IBBS200Ds/
and IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/
IBBS20 IBBS300Ts/BBC5200T-Ls+1
0Ds/ ODM+1 OFD
IBBS20 ● 1 APM30H (with one
0Ts/ DCDU)+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS30 IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
0Ds/
IBBS30
0Ts/
BBC52
00T-Ls
initiall
y
config
ured
on a
1:2
ratio
● APM3
0Hs
and
IBBS70
0Ds/
IBBS70
0Ts
initiall
y
config
ured
on a

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power Custome Configur
Require r ation
ment Equipme
nt

1:1 ≤ 13 U ≤ 15 RRUs ● 1 APM30H (with one

ratio DCDU)+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls+1 ODM+1
OFD
● 1 APM30H (with one
DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
ODM+1 OFD

1.5 Unpacking Check

This chapter describes how to unpack the delivered equipment, components, or
parts and check whether all the materials are included and intact.

Context
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts,
you must:
● Package them for delivery before the base station deployment. Unpacked
delivery or package replacement for transferring is not allowed.
● Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
● Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts
with bare hands, sweat-soaked gloves, or dirty gloves.
● Transport the base stations in an environment that meets requirements of
ETSI 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3. For the goods damage caused by non-standard
and violent transportation or non-human factors (such as natural disasters),
the transportation entity should take the responsibility.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.
NOTE

▪ If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on
a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 1-11. Record the ESN
and base station information manually.

▪ If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on
the label and a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 1-12.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Remove the label and record the base station information on the
label marked Site.
NOTE

The base station information includes the name, ID, and location of the base station.

Figure 1-11 ESN position (1)

Figure 1-12 ESN position (2)

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.
NOTE

For a base station configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs
and submit them to the personnel responsible for the base station
commissioning.
● Obtain the ESN on the BBU3910A.
a. Record the ESN on the BBU3910A. The following figure shows the
position of the ESN on the module.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-13 ESN position

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.
NOTE

For a base station configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs
and submit them to the personnel responsible for the base station
commissioning.
● Obtain the ESN on the BBU3910C.
a. Remove the backup ESN label from the surface of the BBU3910C. The
following figure shows the position of the backup ESN label.
NOTE

Before removing the backup ESN label, take a photo of it.

Figure 1-14 Removing the backup ESN label of the BBU3910C

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

For a base station configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs
and submit them to the personnel responsible for the base station
commissioning.

----End

1.7 Installation Clearance Requirements

This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet. The
clearances are reserved for cable layout and future maintenance.

Clearance Requirements for Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor

On a concrete floor, a cabinet can be installed in the standalone, side-by-side, or
stacking manner.
A minimum of 40 mm (1.58 in.) clearance and a maximum of 150 mm (5.91 in.)
clearance are required between two cabinets installed side by side. If a noise
reduction module (NRM) is to be installed, the minimum clearance between
cabinets is 300 mm (11.81 in.). When the IBBS200T/IBBS300T/BBC5200T/
BBC5300T cabinet is configured and the clearance between the cabinet and its left
cabinet is 40 mm to 320 mm (1.58 in. to 12.60 in.), you can open the door of the
left cabinet before maintenance.
The following figure shows the installation clearance requirements for cabinets
such as the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L
configured for the DBS site.

Figure 1-15 Clearance requirements for installing cabinets on a concrete floor (1)

The following figure shows the installation clearance requirements for cabinets
such as the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and IBBS300D/IBBS300T configured for the
DBS site.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-16 Clearance requirements for installing cabinets on a concrete floor (2)

The following figure shows the installation clearance requirements for cabinets
such as the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and IBBS700D/IBBS700T configured for the
DBS site.
NOTE

When the IBBS700D or IBBS700T is configured, align the front doors of all cabinets when the
site has sufficient space or align the rear of the cabinets when the space is insufficient.

Figure 1-17 Clearance requirements for installing cabinets on a concrete floor (3)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

● Only the APM30H and TMC11H can be installed on a pole or wall.

● When the APM30H (Ver.D) needs to provide power for 13 to 15 RRUs, an ODM06D or
OFD06 is required.
● When the APM30H (Ver.E) needs to provide power for 16 to 21 RRUs, an ODM06D is
required.
● The ODM06D can be installed on a mounting frame or pole.

Clearance Requirements for Installing a Cabinet on a Pole

The diameter of a pole for installing a single cabinet ranges from 60 mm to 114
mm (2.36 in. to 4.49 in.). The recommended diameter is 80 mm (3.15 in.).

The recommended thickness of the pole wall is 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) or above.

The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on
a pole.

Figure 1-18 Clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a pole

The ODM06D can be installed on a pole of which the diameter ranges from 48
mm to 114 mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an ODM06D
on a pole.

Figure 1-19 Clearance requirements for installing an ODM06D on a pole

The OFD06 can be installed on a pole of which the diameter ranges from 48 mm
to 114 mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.).
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an OFD06 on
a pole.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-20 Clearance requirements for installing an OFD06 on a pole

Clearance Requirements for Installing a Cabinet on a Wall

● When a cabinet is installed, the wall must be capable of bearing at least four
times the weight of the cabinet.
● Expansion bolts must be tightened to 30 N·m (265.52 lbf·in.) so that the bolts
stay secured without damaging the wall.
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a single
cabinet on a wall.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-21 Clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a wall

1.8 Installation Process

For details about how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guide.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-22 Installation process

1.9 Installing a Cabinet

This section describes the procedures for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor, a
pole, and a wall. The same procedure is used for installing the following cabinets
on a concrete floor, a pole, and a wall: APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E), APM30H
(Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.D)/
TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses an APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.

1.9.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor

This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor.

1.9.1.1 Installing a Base

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a base for a
cabinet.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Procedure
● Install the base for an APM30H/TMC11H/RFC/IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L.
a. Determine the position for installing the base.
i. Determine the position for installing the cabinet according to the
engineering drawing and 1.7 Installation Clearance Requirements.
ii. Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in
the following figure, to determine the position for installing the base.
iii. After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape
to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the
dimensions are accurate.

Figure 1-23 Anchor points for a base

(1) Wall (2) Screw hole

b. Drill holes at the anchor points, and then insert expansion bolts, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTICE

● Take proper safety measures to protect eyes and respiratory tract

against the dust before drilling holes.
● After dismantling the expansion bolts, ensure that the top of each
expansion tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet
cannot be installed on the concrete floor evenly and securely.

NOTE

In most cases, the concrete floor is smooth. Therefore, use a chisel to make a
dent on the floor before using a hammer drill. Skip this step if the ground is easy
to drill.

i. Use a hammer drill with a Ф16 drill bit to drill holes at the anchor
points with a depth ranging from 55 mm to 60 mm (2.17 in. to 2.36
in.).
ii. Use a vacuum cleaner to wipe away any dust in and around the
holes and measure the spacing between holes. If any of the holes is
beyond the acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a
new hole.
iii. Partially tighten the expansion bolts and vertically insert them into
the drilled holes.
iv. Use a rubber mallet to pound each expansion bolt until the
corresponding expansion tube completely enters the hole.
v. Turn the M12x60 bolt counterclockwise and remove the bolt, spring
washer, and flat washer in sequence.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-24 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion bolt

(1) M12x60 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Expansion tube

c. Install the base, as shown in the following figure.

i. Place the base in a correct direction on the concrete pad.
ii. Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not
tighten them.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-25 Installing the base in the correct position

d. Adjust the levelness of the base, as shown in the following figure.

i. Place the level on the base and observe the position of the bubble.
ii. The base is horizontal only when the bubble is in the center of the
level. Add spacers between the base and the concrete pad to adjust
the levelness if necessary.

Figure 1-26 Adjusting the levelness of a base

(1) Level (2) Spacer

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

e. Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts in a diagonal sequence

to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-27 Tightening the bolts on a base

f. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws on

the front cover plate for the base, and remove the front cover plate, as
shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Do not discard the removed screws and cover plate. They are required during future
installation.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-28 Removing a front cover plate

g. Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as
shown in the following figure.
i. Loosen the butterfly nuts on both sides of the base and move away
the side plates.
ii. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M4 screw assemblies on
the rear left side of the base and slide the baffle plates to the left.
Then, remove the baffle plates on the right one by one.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-29 Removing the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of
the base

● Install the base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

a. Determine the position for installing the base.
i. Determine the position for installing the cabinet according to the
engineering drawing and 1.7 Installation Clearance Requirements.
ii. Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in
the following figure, to determine the position for installing the base.
iii. After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape
to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the
dimensions are accurate.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-30 Anchor points for a base

(1) Wall (2) Screw hole

b. Drill holes at the anchor points, and then insert expansion bolts, as
shown in the following figure.

NOTICE

● Take proper safety measures to protect eyes and respiratory tract

NOTE

In most cases, the concrete floor is smooth. Therefore, use a chisel to make a
dent on the floor before using a hammer drill. Skip this step if the ground is easy
to drill.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-31 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion bolt

(1) M12x60 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Expansion tube

c. Install the base, as shown in the following figure.

i. Place the base in a correct direction on the concrete pad.
ii. Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not
tighten them.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-32 Installing the base in the correct position

d. Adjust the levelness of the base, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-33 Adjusting the levelness of a base

(1) Level (2) Spacer

e. Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts in a diagonal sequence

to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-34 Tightening the bolts on a base

f. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M6 countersunk screws on

the front cover plate for the base, and remove the front cover plate, as
shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Do not discard the removed screws and cover plate. They are required during future
installation.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-35 Removing a front cover plate

g. Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as
shown in the following figure.
i. Loosen the butterfly nuts on both sides of the base and move away
the side plates.
ii. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M6 screw assemblies on
the rear left side of the base and slide the baffle plates to the left.
Then, remove the baffle plates on the right.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-36 Removing the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of
the base

----End

1.9.1.2 Installing a Cabinet on a Base

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a cabinet on a
base.

Context
● The procedures for installing the APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L, and IBBS300D/IBBS300T are the same. This section
uses the APM30H as an example.

NOTICE

Do not lift an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5200D-L/

BBC5200T-L configured with storage batteries.

● If the space is insufficient to install bolts at the bottom of the APM30H,

remove one or two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the
cabinet and reinstall them after the installation.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

The APM30H (Ver.D) and APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinets are configured with air baffles.
The APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinets are configured with filler modules.

Procedure
Step 1 Place the APM30H onto the base and align the bolt holes in the cabinet with
those in the base, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-37 Placing the APM30H onto the base

Step 2 Optional: Remove one to two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the
APM30H.
● Remove one or two air baffles from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.D) or
APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-38 Removing the air baffle

● Remove one or two filler modules from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.B)/
APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-39 Removing the filler module

Step 3 Use four M12x35 bolts to secure the APM30H onto the base, and use a torque
wrench to tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE

The gasket with an oblong hole is not required when you install an IBBS300D/IBBS300T on a
base.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-40 Securing the APM30H onto the base

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof (5) Gasket with
rubber washer an oblong hole

Step 4 Optional: Reinstall the removed air baffles or filler modules. Secure the air baffles
or filler modules to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).

----End

1.9.1.3 Stacking Two Cabinets

This section describes the procedure and precautions for stacking two cabinets.

Context
The DBS site supports the following stacking scenarios: an APM30H/TMC11H
stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T, or BBC5200D-L; an
IBBS200D/IBBS200T stacked on another IBBS200D/IBBS200T; an IBBS300D/
IBBS300T stacked on another IBBS300D/IBBS300T; and a BBC5200D-L stacked on
another BBC5200D-L.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the lower cabinet on the base. For detailed operations, see 1.9.1.2
Installing a Cabinet on a Base.

Step 2 Remove the cover plates from the cable outlets at the top of the cabinet, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-41 Removing the cover plates from the cable holes

Step 3 Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-42 Removing the plastic screws

Step 4 Stack the cabinets and ensure that the installation holes on the upper cabinet are
aligned with the installation holes on the lower cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-43 Stacking the cabinets

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 5 Use a torque wrench to secure the four M12x35 bolts inside the cabinet in a
diagonal sequence to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

The gasket in the following figure is not required when IBBS300D/IBBS300T cabinets are
stacked.

Figure 1-44 Tightening the bolts

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof (5) Gasket with
rubber washer an oblong hole

----End

1.9.2 Installing a Cabinet on a Pole

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a cabinet on a
pole.

Context
● The cabinet can be installed at a maximum height of 10 m (32.81 ft).
● The procedures for installing the APM30H and TMC11H are the same. This
section uses the APM30H as an example.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTICE

IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and BBC5200D-L cabinets cannot be

installed on a wall or pole.

The diameter of the pole ranges from 60 mm to 230 mm (2.36 in. to 9.06 in.). The
recommended wall thickness of the pole is 4 mm (0.16 in.) or higher. The
following figure shows the diameter of a pole.

Figure 1-45 Diameter of a pole

Procedure
Step 1 At an appropriate height on the pole, use four M12x180 bolts to secure a ladder-
shaped bracket onto the pole, and tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-46 Installing the ladder-shaped bracket

(1) Attachment plate (2) Ladder-shaped bracket (3) Pole

(4) Bolt (5) Spring washer (6) Flat washer

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 2 Remove the two plastic bolts at the rear top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-47 Removing the plastic bolts

Step 3 Install a bar at the top of the cabinet and use a socket wrench to tighten two
M12x35 bolts on the bar to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-48 Installing a bar

(1) Bar

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Optional: Remove one to two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the
APM30H.
● Remove one or two air baffles from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.D) or
APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-49 Removing the air baffle

● Remove one or two filler modules from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.B)/
APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-50 Removing the filler module

Step 5 Place the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, use four M12x35 bolts to secure
the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, and use a torque wrench to tighten
the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-51 Securing the cabinet

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof (5) Gasket with
rubber washer an oblong hole

Step 6 Put a U-shaped bracket through the holes in the bar at the top of the cabinet, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-52 Installing the U-shaped bracket

(1) Flat washer (2) Spring washer (3) Nut

Step 7 Optional: Reinstall the removed air baffles or filler modules. Secure the air baffles
or filler modules to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).

----End

1.9.3 Installing a Cabinet on a Wall

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a cabinet on a
wall.

Context
● The cabinet can be installed at a maximum height of 10 m (32.81 ft).
● The procedures for installing the APM30H and TMC11H are the same. This
section uses the APM30H as an example.

NOTICE

IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and BBC5200D-L/BBC5300D-L cabinets

cannot be installed on a wall or pole.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Place a marking-off template against the wall, use a level to ensure that the
marking-off template is placed horizontally, and then use a marker to mark six
anchor points, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-53 Marking the anchor points

(1) Anchor points (2) Marking-off template

Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolts into the holes, as shown
in the following figure.
1. Use a hammer drill with a Ф16 drill bit to drill holes at the anchor points with
a depth ranging from 55 mm to 60 mm (2.17 in. to 2.36 in.).

NOTICE

Take proper safety measures to protect eyes and respiratory tract against the
dust before drilling holes.

2. Tighten the expansion bolts slightly, and place each expansion bolt vertically
into each hole.
3. Use a rubber mallet to pound each expansion bolt until the corresponding
expansion tube completely enters the hole. Then, secure the bolts.
4. Remove the bolts, spring washers, and flat washers in sequence.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-54 Drilling holes and installing expansion bolts

(1) Bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Expansion tube

Step 3 Align the ladder-shaped bracket with the four lower holes in the wall and use four
M12x60 bolts to tighten the ladder-shaped bracket with a torque of 45 N·m
(398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-55 Installing the ladder-shaped bracket

(1) Bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Remove the two plastic bolts at the rear top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-56 Removing the plastic bolts

Step 5 Install a bar at the top of the cabinet and use a socket wrench to tighten two
M12x35 bolts on the bar to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-57 Installing a bar

(1) Bar

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 6 Optional: Remove one to two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the
APM30H.
● Remove one or two air baffles from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.D) or
APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-58 Removing the air baffle

● Remove one or two filler modules from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.B)/
APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-59 Removing the filler module

Step 7 Place the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, use four M12x35 bolts to secure
the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, and use a torque wrench to tighten
the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-60 Securing the cabinet

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof (5) Gasket with
rubber washer an oblong hole

Step 8 Use two bolts to secure the bar on the cabinet onto the wall, as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-61 Securing the bar

Step 9 Optional: Reinstall the removed air baffles or filler modules. Secure the air baffles
or filler modules to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).

----End

1.10 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential

Cable
A PGND cable connects the ground screw in a cabinet to an external ground bar
to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects
ground screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between
the cabinets.

Context
The principles for grounding a DBS site are as follows:
● The stacked cabinets or side-by-side cabinets are connected using an
equipotential cable.
● When an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5200D-L is configured,
the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5200D-L under the basic
APM30H is connected to other lower cabinets using equipotential cables.
● When an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5200D-L is configured,
the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5200D-L under the basic
APM30H is connected to the external ground bar using PGND cables.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● When an IBBS700D/IBBS700T is configured, the IBBS700D/IBBS700T on the

left of the basic APM30H is connected to the external ground bar using PGND
cables.
NOTE

If one of the cabinets mentioned above is not configured at a site, ignore descriptions about this
cabinet.

The following table lists the specifications of PGND cables and equipotential
cables in the APM30H series cabinets.

Table 1-5 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

Cable Scenario Cross-Sectional Color
Area of the Cable
and Size of the
OT Terminal

PGND In APM30H (Ver.B) OT terminal (M6, Green and yellow

cable series cabinets 16 mm2 or 0.025
and the APM30H in.2)
(Ver.B) +24 V
cabinet

PGND In APM30H OT terminal (M6, ● 220 V AC or -48 V DC

cable (Ver.C) series 16 mm2 or 0.025 input: green and
cabinets in.2) yellow
● 110 V AC input: green

PGND In APM30H OT terminal (M6, ● 220 V AC input: green

cable (Ver.D)/APM30H 16 mm2 or 0.025 and yellow
(Ver.E) series in.2) ● 110 V AC input: green
cabinets

Equipotent In APM30H (Ver.B) OT terminal (M6, Green and yellow

ial cable series cabinets 16 mm2 or 0.025
and the APM30H in.2)
(Ver.B) +24 V
cabinet

Equipotent In APM30H OT terminal (M6, ● 220 V AC or -48 V DC

ial cable (Ver.C) series 16 mm2 or 0.025 input: green and
cabinets in.2) yellow
● 110 V AC input: green

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable Scenario Cross-Sectional Color

Area of the Cable
and Size of the
OT Terminal

Equipotent In APM30H ● OT terminal ● 220 V AC input: green

ial cable (Ver.D)/APM30H (M6, 16 mm2 and yellow
(Ver.E) series or 0.025 in.2) ● 110 V AC input: green
cabinets for the stacked
cabinets
● OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2
or 0.039 in.2)
for the cabinets
installed side
by side

Table 1-6 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

Cable Scenario Cross-Sectional Color
Area of the Cable
and Size of the
OT Terminal

PGND In APM30H OT terminal (M6, ● 220 V AC input: green

cable (Ver.D)/APM30H 16 mm2 or 0.025 and yellow
(Ver.E) series in.2) ● 110 V AC input: green
cabinets

Equipotent In APM30H ● OT terminal ● 220 V AC input: green

NOTE

The PGND cable is installed in the same way in APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H
(Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinets. This section uses APM30H (Ver.E) series
cabinets as an example.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable by following the instructions in
Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 1-63 and Figure 1-65.
1. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar in the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L under the basic APM30H, IBBS300D/IBBS300T under
the basic APM30H, or IBBS700D/IBBS700T on the left of the basic APM30H.
Then, tighten the screw on the OT terminal to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the main ground bar outside the
cabinet.
NOTE

When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as
shown in Figure 1-62.

Figure 1-62 Correct and incorrect directions for installing an OT terminal

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-63 Installing the PGND cable (when the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-

L/BBC5200T-L is configured)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-64 Installing the PGND cable (when the IBBS300D/IBBS300T is

configured)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-65 Installing the PGND cable (when the IBBS700D/IBBS700T is

configured)

(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) PGND cable (3) External ground bar

Step 3 Install the equipotential cable, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-66 Installing the equipotential cable (when the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/

BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L is configured)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-67 Installing the equipotential cable (when the IBBS300D/IBBS300T is

configured)

(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) Equipotential cable

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-68 Installing the equipotential cable (when the IBBS700D/IBBS700T is

configured)

(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) Equipotential cable

Step 4 Install the PGND cable and equipotential cable for the APM30H cabinet, as shown
in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of
the cabinet under the APM30H, and secure the screw on the OT terminal to
4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). Then, connect the other end to the external ground
bar.
2. Install the equipotential cable.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-69 Installing the PGND cable and equipotential cable

(1) Ground bar on the (2) PGND cable (3) Equipotential cable (4) Main ground bar
inner wall of the
cabinet

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.11 Installing BBU 0

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing BBU 0. BBU 0
can be a BBU3900/BBU3910.

1.11.1 Installing a BBU3900/BBU3910

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a BBU3900/
BBU3910.

Context
● A maximum of two BBUs can be installed in the APM30H/TMC11H of a
DBS3900 based on the onsite conditions.
● In a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.D) or APM30H (Ver.E), when
two BBUs are installed during initial site deployment, both BBUs are installed
in the APM30H and the transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
When a second BBU is installed during capacity expansion, the BBU is
installed in the APM30H if there is sufficient space. Otherwise, the BBU is
installed in a TMC11H. When two BBUs are installed in a cabinet, BBU 1 is
installed in the 2 U space below BBU 0. The two BBUs must be installed
adjacently. No vacant space or equipment is allowed between the two BBUs.
● In a DBS3900 configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E), when
two BBUs are installed during initial site deployment, both BBUs are installed

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

in the TMC11H (with a built-in BBU3900 and –48 V DC power input) and the
transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H (only providing transmission
space). When a second BBU is installed during capacity expansion, the BBU is
installed in the TMC11H (with a built-in BBU3900 and –48 V DC power input)
if there is sufficient space. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only
providing transmission space).
● The following figure shows the positions for installing BBUs in an APM30H
(Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E).

Figure 1-70 Positions for installing BBUs in an APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H

(Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E)

● The following figure shows the positions for installing BBUs in an APM30H
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-71 Positions for installing BBUs in an APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H

(Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)

NOTE

● The BBU case has a left-in-right-out ventilation channel. It can be stacked with a device
using a left-in-right-out ventilation channel but cannot be stacked with a device using a
right-in-left-out ventilation channel.
● For an indoor application, the BBU case can be installed in a standardized indoor equipment
room but cannot be installed in an equipment room using direct ventilation.
● For an outdoor application, the BBU case can be installed in a cabinet using a heat
exchanger but cannot be installed in a cabinet using direct ventilation. For the specific
cabinet types, see the related hardware documentation.

Procedure
Step 1 If a BBU is installed in an OMB/indoor centralized rack (ICR), perform the
following operations to reinstall the BBU mounting ears in standard mode. Skip
this step if a BBU is installed in other cabinets.
1. Remove the mounting ears on the BBU, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-72 Removing the mounting ears on the BBU

2. Remove the two ground screws, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-73 Removing the ground screws

3. Reinstall the mounting ears in standard mode and tighten the four M6x12
screws on each of the mounting ears, with a torque of 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-74 Reinstalling the mounting ears in standard mode

Step 2 Optional: Install cable claws for the BBU in the APM30H or TMC11H.
Align cable claws with the holes on each side of the BBU. Then use two M4 screws
to secure the cable claws to the BBU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62
lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-75 Installing cable claws on the BBU

Step 3 Slide the BBU into the cabinet, and tighten the four M6x16 screws on the BBU
panel to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTICE

When installing a BBU equipped with boards, hold the bottom of the BBU with
your hands and slide it into the cabinet slowly to prevent it from falling.

Figure 1-76 Installing a BBU

----End

1.12 Installing the SLPU as a Trunk Signal Protection

Unit
When an outdoor base station transmits signals through an E1/T1 or FE/GE port,
you need to install the SLPU as a trunk signal protection unit.

Context
The trunk signal protection unit is installed in the 1 U space below the fan
assembly at the top of the APM30H, TP48600A, or TMC11H cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the cable claws, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the SLPU.
2. Place a cable claw between the mounting ear and the SLPU on each side,
move the mounting ear backwards by one hole, and align the mounting holes
in the cable claw with those in the mounting ear and the SLPU.
3. Use two removed M4 screws to secure the mounting ear and cable claw to
the SLPU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-77 Installing cable claws on the SLPU

Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two
M6x12 screws on the mounting ears to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-78 Installing the SLPU

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

----End

1.13 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables

This section describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their
cables onsite.

1.13.1 Installing BBU 1

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing BBU 1. BBU 1
can be a BBU5900.

1.13.1.1 Installing a BBU5900

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a second BBU.

Context
When the site is configured with an APM30H, TMC11H, APM5930(AC), or
APM5930(DC), a maximum of two BBUs can be installed. The following figure
shows the positions for installing the two BBUs.
NOTE

● BBU 0 is mandatory, and BBU 1 is optional.

● When two BBUs are installed in a cabinet, BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space below BBU 0.
The two BBUs must be installed in consecutive order. No vacant slot or equipment is allowed
between the two BBUs.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-79 Positions for installing BBUs in cabinets

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

The removed air baffles must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet
from top down. If vacant slots are all occupied with air baffles, other redundant air baffles are
discarded.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-80 Removing the air baffle

Step 2 Optional: When cable claws are not required onsite, align the BBU mounting ears
with the mounting holes, slide the BBU along the guide rails into the cabinet, and
tighten the four M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE

Cable claws for the BBU5900 are optional based on site requirements.

Figure 1-81 Installing a BBU5900 (without cable claws)

Step 3 Optional: When cable claws are required onsite, align the BBU mounting ears and
cable claws with the mounting holes, slide the BBU along the guide rails into the
cabinet, and tighten the four M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-82 Installing a BBU5900 (with cable claws)

Step 4 Optional: In most cases, an HDEPC connector has been added to one end of the
BBU power cables before delivery. Connectors must be added to the other end of
the cables on the power equipment side onsite. If an HDEPC connector needs to
be added onsite, see the instructions in Assembling the HDEPC Connector and
Power Cables.
Step 5 Connect the HDEPC connector at one end of the BBU power cables to the UPEU in
the BBU5900.
Step 6 Install the BBU power cables, as listed in the following table and shown in the
following figure.

CAUTION

When installing a BBU power cable for a running base station, connect the cable
to the BBU before connecting it to the power equipment. The operations in the
reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury.

NOTE

● In most regions except UK and China, the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wires are black and blue,
respectively.
● In UK, the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wires are blue and gray, respectively.
● In China, the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wires are red and blue, respectively.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-7 Connectors on BBU power cables

Base Station Cabinet Type Power Installation
Type Equipment Position

BTS3900A APM30H (Ver.E) EPU05A-06/08 "LOAD1",

"LOAD5", or
"LOAD6" port

EPU02D-02/ "LOAD0" or
EPU02B/EPU02S "LOAD1" port

DCDU16D "LOAD3" or
"LOAD4" port

TMC11H (Ver.E) DCDU-12C "LOAD4",

"LOAD5", or
"LOAD7" port

EPU02D-02/ "LOAD0" or
EPU02B/EPU02S "LOAD1" port

NOTE

If the LOAD8 and LOAD9 ports on the DCDU15D are occupied, install another DCDU to supply
power to the second BBU.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-84 Installing BBU power cables when the BBU is installed in the
transmission cabinet

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-85 Position for installing the power cables of the second power board in
an APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet

Step 7 Attach labels to the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an
L-Shaped Label.
NOTE

● Attach an engineering label to the positive and negative cables on the power equipment
side. And attach the engineering labels with the same content to the corresponding cables
on the BBU side.
● It is recommended that a label on the BBU side be attached 70 mm to 100 mm (2.76 in. to
3.94 in.) away from the HDEPC connector.
● PWR0 and PWR1 in the following figure are for illustration only.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-86 Attaching labels

----End

1.13.1.2 Installing Boards in a BBU5900

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing boards in a
BBU5900 and installing surge protection boards.

Context
The boards in the BBU to be installed include main control boards (UMPT), half-
width baseband processing units (UBBP), full-width baseband processing units
(UBBPfw1), and power boards (UPEU). The boards to be installed onsite depend
on the configuration requirements of a base station. The following part uses the
procedure for installing a UMPT as an example. The procedures for installing a
UMPT and a UBBP in the BBU are the same.

Operation Rules
● When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown by the
correct operation in the following figure.

Figure 1-87 Incorrect and correct operations when moving a board

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● When installing a board, hold the ejector lever side of the board with one
hand and hold another side of the board with the other hand to ensure that
the board is moving in the correct direction. Do not hold the board with only
one hand and never apply lateral forces to the board. The following figure
shows incorrect and correct operations of installing a board.

Figure 1-88 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (1)

● When installing a board, ensure that your hands are level so that the board
and the guide rails are on the same level. Do not apply lateral forces to the
board. Otherwise, the board will be distorted. The following figure shows
incorrect and correct operations of installing a board.

Figure 1-89 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (2)

NOTICE

● Handle the board with care and avoid collision. Do not pile or compress boards
after they are unpacked.
● When inserting a board into a subrack, prevent it from colliding with the
subrack and push it into the subrack until it snaps into place.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Put on a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE

When installing a board, wear ESD gloves to prevent contamination or

electrostatic damage to the board.

Step 2 Install a UMPT.

1. Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and slowly
remove the filler panel.
2. If there is an ejector lever on the board panel, pull out the ejector lever and
remove the board. If no ejector lever is available, remove the board directly.
3. Slowly insert the board into the slot until it snaps into place. Push the ejector
lever, if any.
4. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws on the board
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-90 Installing a UMPT

Step 3 Optional: In an outdoor base station, you need to install a UELP or UFLP. The
following describes how to install a UELP in an SLPU as an example.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and slowly
remove the filler panel.
2. Slowly insert the board into the slot until it snaps into place.
3. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws on the board
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-91 Installing a board in an SLPU

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Optional: Install a UBBPfw1. For detailed operations, see Installing a Full-Width
Board.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panel or half-width board in the slot, and then
slowly remove the filler panel or half-width board from the slot.
2. Remove the guide rail between the left and right slots. Use a Phillips
screwdriver to loosen the M3 screw on the guide rail until it is detached from
the guide rail, and slowly pull out the guide rail.

Figure 1-92 Removing the guide rail

3. Take the full-width board out of the ESD bag, and raise the ejector levers on
the panel of the board.
4. Insert the full-width board into the slot, and slowly push the board until it is
in contact with the backplane. Then, use both hands to push the ejector levers
and properly install the board.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

5. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws on the board
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

NOTICE

● Use both hands to remove and install a full-width board. During the operations,
hold the bottom of the board with one hand. Do not apply main forces to the
ejector levers. Otherwise, the ejector levers or the board may be damaged.
● Pay attention to the position of the barcode label on the board when inserting
the full-width board into the slot. The barcode label must not be stuck between
the board and the guide rail.
● Store the removed guide rail in a proper place for future maintenance.

Figure 1-93 Installing a UBBPfw1

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 5 Install a UPEU.

1. Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and slowly
remove the filler panel.
2. Slowly insert the board into the slot until it snaps into place.
3. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws on the board
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-94 Installing a UPEU

4. Add connectors to power cables on the power equipment side. Connect the
HDEPC connector at one end of each power cable to the new UPEU and the
connector at the other end to the corresponding port on the power
equipment. The power cable connections are illustrated in the following table
and figure.
NOTE

In most cases, an HDEPC connector has been added to one end of each BBU power cable
before delivery. Connectors must be added to the other ends of BBU power cables on the
power equipment onsite. If an HDEPC connector must be added onsite, see Assembling the
HDEPC Connector and Power Cables.

(Ver.D) (Ver.D) LOAD6 ports on EPC4 Connector
the EPU05A-02/04 and the Power
– LOAD0 and Cable
LOAD1 ports on
the EPU02D-02/
EPU02B/EPU02S
– LOAD3 and
LOAD4 ports on
the DCDU16D

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Installation Position Method of Adding

Station a Connector
Type

TMC11H – LOAD0 and Assembling an

(Ver.D) LOAD1 ports on EPC4 Connector
the DCDU-12C and the Power
– LOAD0 and Cable
LOAD1 ports on
the EPU02D-02/
EPU02B/EPU02S
– LOAD3 and
LOAD4 ports on
the DCDU16D

For the second BBU (if any) in the APM5930(AC), the power cables of the
BBU are connected to the "LOAD2" and "LOAD5" ports on the EPU05A-11/
EPU05A-12. For the second BBU (if any) in the APM5930(DC), the power
cables of the BBU are connected to the "LOAD8" and "LOAD9" ports on the
DCDU15D.

NOTE

An APM5930(AC) is configured with a maximum of two power boards by default. An

APM5930(DC) is configured with one power board by default.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-95 Position for installing the power cables of the second power
board in a BTS5900 cabinet

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-96 Position for installing the power cables of the second power
board in a BTS5900L cabinet

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-97 Position for installing the power cables of the second power
board in an APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinet

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-98 Position for installing the power cables of the second power
board in an APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-99 Position for installing the power cables of the second BBU in an
APM5930(AC)/APM5930(DC)

----End

1.13.2 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection

Unit
When an outdoor base station uses one to sixteen customized alarm inputs, you
need to install the SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit and its cables.

Context
● The following table lists the cable specifications of the SLPU.

Table 1-10 Cable specifications

Cable One End The Other End Remarks

Surge protection RJ45 connector RJ45 connector Gray shielded

transfer cable for straight-through
monitoring cable
signals

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other End Remarks

External dry Bare wire Depending on -

contact the external
monitoring equipment
signal cable

● An SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under a BBU.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform required operations according to the type of a cabinet.

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) or TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H Go to Step 2.

(Ver.C)

APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H Go to Step 3.

(Ver.E)

Step 2 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler
module, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting
ear on each side of the filler module.
2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE

The removed filler modules must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet
from top down. If vacant slots are all occupied with filler modules, other redundant filler
modules are discarded.

Figure 1-100 Removing the filler module

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Figure 1-101 Removing the air baffle

Step 4 Install the cable claws, as shown in the following figure.

1. Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the SLPU.
2. Place a cable claw between the mounting ear and the SLPU on each side,
move the mounting ear backwards by one hole, and align the mounting holes
in the cable claw with those in the mounting ear and the SLPU.
3. Use two removed M4 screws to secure the mounting ear and cable claw to
the SLPU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-102 Installing cable claws on the SLPU

Step 5 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two
M6x12 screws on the mounting ears to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-103 Installing the SLPU

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 6 Install the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals, as shown in
the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the
SLPU.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the
BBU.

Figure 1-104 Installing the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring
signals

NOTE

The number of surge protection transfer cables for monitoring signals depends on the
actual number of customized alarms. A maximum of four such cables are supported, as
shown in the following figure. For details about the numbers of customized alarms and
cable connections, see section "Customized Alarm Input Principles" in the related hardware
description.

Figure 1-105 Connections of the surge protection transfer cable for the
monitoring signals

Step 7 Install an external dry contact monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Cut the external dry contact monitoring signal cable to the length suitable for
the actual cable route.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

2. Strip an 8 mm (0.31 in) length of the jacket off the cable connected to the
USLP2 to expose the wires.
3. Use a screwdriver to press the IN0 port on the USLP, insert an external dry
contact monitoring signal cable into the port, and move the screwdriver away.
Then, repeat this procedure to insert external dry contact monitoring signal
cables into IN1 to IN3 ports.

Figure 1-106 Installing external dry contact monitoring signal cables

Step 8 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.13.3 Installing the SOU

This section describes the procedure for installing a service outlet unit (SOU) and
its power cable when a DBS site is configured with an APM30H/APM5930.

Context
The following figure shows the position of an SOU.
NOTE

The SOU is preferentially installed in the 1 U space at the lowest layer of the cabinet. The
following figure uses an APM5930 as an example.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-107 Position of an SOU in an APM5930

There are four types of mounting kits designed in different specifications and used
in different countries and regions, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-108 Specifications of SOU mounting kits

(1) UK standard (2) Universal (3) American standard (4) European standard

Procedure
Step 1 Slide the SOU into the cabinet, and tighten four M6x12 screws to 2 N·m (17.70
lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-109 Installing an SOU

Step 2 Install the SOU power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Turn off the "AC OUTPUT" breaker on the EPS/EPU subrack.
2. Connect the C13 connector at one end of the SOU power cable to the power
input port on the SOU.
3. Open the protective cover for the "AC OUTPUT" port on the EPS/EPU subrack.
4. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown and blue wires of the
SOU power cable to the "L2" and "N2" wiring terminals in the "AC OUTPUT"
port on the EPS/EPU subrack, respectively. Connect the green and yellow wire
of the SOU power cable to the ground terminal on the left mounting ear.
Tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
5. Close the protective cover for the "AC OUTPUT" port on the EPS/EPU subrack
and install the AC baffle plate. Tighten the screws to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
NOTE

The installation of the SOU power cable in an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H
(Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.E), and APM5930(AC) is the same. The following figure uses the
installation of the SOU power cable in an APM5930(AC) as an example.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-110 Installing an SOU power cable

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.4 Installing the AC Heater

When a cabinet is in a low ambient temperature, an AC heater can be installed to
maintain a proper temperature in the cabinet. This section describes the procedure
for installing an AC heater in an APM30H or a TMC11H.

Context
The procedures for installing an AC heater are the same in an APM30H or a
TMC11H of Ver.D, Ver.B, Ver.C, and Ver.E. This section illustrates how to install an
AC heater in an APM30H (Ver.E) and a TMC11H (Ver.E).

If a service outlet unit (SOU) is not installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater in
the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-111. If an SOU
is installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater above the SOU, as shown in Figure
1-112.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-111 Position of the AC heater (1)

Figure 1-112 Position of the AC heater (2)

(1) AC heater (2) SOU

Procedure
Step 1 Slide the AC heater into the installation position, and tighten the four M6x12
screws on the panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-113 Installing the AC heater

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 2 Install the AC heater power cable.

If... Then...

The AC heater is to be installed in an APM30H, Go to Step 2.1.

The AC heater is to be installed in a TMC11H, Go to Step 2.2.

1. Install the AC heater power cable in the APM30H.

a. Remove the cover plate of the AC junction box.
b. Connect the C13 connector at the other end of the AC heater power
cable to the power input port on the AC heater.
c. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and
yellow wires of the AC heater power cable to the L0, N0, and PE
terminals in the AC junction box, respectively.
d. Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and tighten the screws on
the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-114 Installing the AC heater power cable

2. Install the AC heater power cable in the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 1-115
and Figure 1-116.
a. Remove the cover plate of the AC junction box.
b. Connect the C13 connector at the other end of the AC heater power
cable to the power input port on the AC heater.
c. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and
yellow wires of the AC heater power cable to the L0, N0, and PE
terminals in the AC junction box, respectively.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

d. Install the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H as
follows: Route the cables into the cabinet from the left side of the
cabinet, and then connect the OT terminals at one end of the cables to
the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H and the
other end of the cables to the external power equipment.
e. Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and tighten the screws on
the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-115 Installing the heater power cable

Figure 1-116 Installing power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.5 Installing an EMUA/EMUB

When an outdoor base station uses 17 to 32 customized alarm inputs, you need to
install an EMUA/EMUB and its cables.

Context
● An EMUA or EMUB is installed in a reserved slot in a cabinet. In normal cases,
it is installed in the 1 U space under the installed devices in a cabinet.
● The following table lists the specifications of EMUA or EMUB cables.

Table 1-11 Cable specifications

Cable Color One End The Other End

Most UK
Region
s

EMUA RTN(+) Black Blue EPC4 2-pin connector

or wire connector
EMUB
power NEG(-) Blue Gray
cable wire

EMUA or EMUB Black Black DB9 male RJ45 connector

monitoring signal connector
cable

● This section uses an EMUB as an example. An EMUA is installed in the same

way as an EMUB.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform required operations according to the type of an APM30H.

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)/TMC11H Go to Step 2.

(Ver.C)

APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H Go to Step 3.

(Ver.E)

Step 2 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler
module, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting
ear on each side of the filler module.
2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE

Figure 1-117 Removing the filler module

Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Figure 1-118 Removing the air baffle

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Optional: Align the holes on the cable claws with the holes on the mounting ears
on both sides of the EMUB, and stick the cable claws onto both sides of the
EMUB, as shown in the following figure. If an EMUA is to be installed, skip this
step.

Figure 1-119 Sticking cable claws onto an EMUB

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 5 Install the EMUA or EMUB, as shown in the following figure.

1. Slowly slide the EMUA or EMUB into the installation position.
2. Tighten the four M6 screws on the mounting ear on both sides of the EMUA
or EMUB to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-120 Installing the EMUA or EMUB

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 6 Prepare an EMUA/EMUB power cable.

1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add a 2-pin connector to one end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable by
following the instructions in Assembling a 2-Pin Connector.
3. Add a corresponding connector to the other end of the EMUA/EMUB power
cable depending on the power equipment, as listed in the following table.

Table 1-12 Methods of adding a connector to the EMUA/EMUB power cable

Cabine Base Power Installation Method of Adding a
t Type Station Equipme Position Connector
Type nt

APM30 BTS3900A EPS DC output Assembling a Female

H 01A/EPS terminal Fast Connector
(Ver.B) 01C "LOAD7" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

DBS3900 EPS DC output Assembling a Female

01B/EPS terminal Fast Connector
01D "LOAD7" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

TMC11 BTS3900A DCDU-03 DC output Assembling the OT

H C terminal Terminal and the
(Ver.B) "LOAD7" Power Cable

DBS3900 DCDU-03 DC output Assembling the OT

B terminal Terminal and the
"LOAD7" Power Cable

APM30 BTS3900A EPU03A-0 DC output Assembling a Female

H 2/04 terminal Fast Connector
(Ver.C) "LOAD4" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

DBS3900 EPU03A-0 DC output Assembling a Female

3/05 terminal Fast Connector
"LOAD4" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

TMC11 BTS3900A DCDU-11 DC output Assembling a Female

H C terminal Fast Connector
(Ver.C) "LOAD8" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

DBS3900 DCDU-11 DC output Assembling a Female

B terminal Fast Connector
"LOAD8" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabine Base Power Installation Method of Adding a

t Type Station Equipme Position Connector
Type nt

APM30 BTS3900A EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H 2/04 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD5" Power Cable

APM30 DBS3900 EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H 3/05 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD5" Power Cable

TMC11 BTS3900A DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H C terminal Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD8" Power Cable

TMC11 DBS3900 DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H B terminal Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD8" Power Cable

APM30 BTS3900A/ EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H BTS5900A 6/08 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD5" Power Cable

APM30 DBS3900/ EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H DBS5900 7/09 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD5" Power Cable

TMC11 BTS3900A/ DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H BTS5900A C terminal Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD8" Power Cable

TMC11 DBS3900/ DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H DBS5900 B terminal Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD8" Power Cable

Step 7 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the power cable to the "PWR1"
port on the EMUA or EMUB.
2. Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding power
equipment, as listed in Table 1-12 and shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-121 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cable (in an APM30H)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-122 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cable (in a TMC11H)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

3. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling

Requirements.
4. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-
Tying Label.
Step 8 Install the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the cable to the "RS-485" port
on the EMUA or the "COM_485" port on the EMUB.
2. In a Ver.B/Ver.C/Ver.D cabinet, connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of
the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the PMU. In a Ver.E cabinet, connect the
RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the "MON1-1/D_COM1-1"
port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-123 Installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable (in an

APM30H)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-124 Installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable (in a

TMC11H)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

3. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling

Requirements.
4. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-
Shaped Label.
----End

1.13.6 Installing a PSU

By default, the EPU05A-02/EPU05A-04 or EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05 subrack in an
APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with two PSUs. When current-using equipment is
added, more PSUs must be configured.

Context
The following figure shows the positions for installing PSUs in an APM30H (Ver.D).

Figure 1-125 Installation positions of PSUs

(1) PSU (R4850G2)

Procedure
● Install a PSU in the corresponding slot in the EPU05A-02/EPU05A-04 or
EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05.
a. Remove the corresponding filler panel.
b. Release the buckle on the upper left corner of the PSU, and rotate the
handle on the upper side outwards.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

c. Gently slide the PSU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
d. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-126 Installing a PSU

----End

1.13.7 Installing a DCDU-12B

You need to install a DCDU-12B and its cables when RRUs are added to a base
station regardless of whether the base station is originally configured with only
RFUs or with RFUs and RRUs.

Context
● The following figure shows the installation positions of DCDU-12Bs in
different cabinets.

Table 1-13 Installation positions of DCDU-12Bs

Base Station Application Scenario Installation Position

BTS3900A (Ver.D) In a cabinet serving 1 1 U space at the top of

to 9 RRUs the RFC

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Station Application Scenario Installation Position

BTS3900A (Ver.E) In a cabinet serving 1 1 U space below the

to 6 RRUs in DC BBU in the TMC11H
scenarios

In a cabinet serving 7 1 U space at the top of

to 15 RRUs in DC the RFC
scenarios

DBS3900 In an APM30H (Ver.D) Depending on site

serving 7 to 12 RRUs requirements

In a TMC11H (Ver.D)
serving 7 to 12 RRUs

In a TMC11H (Ver.E)
serving 7 to 21 RRUs

Table 1-14 Installation positions of DCDU-12Bs

Base Station Application Scenario Installation Position

BTS5900A In a cabinet serving 1 1 U space below the

to 6 RRUs in DC BBU in the TMC11H
scenarios

In a cabinet serving 7 1 U space at the top of

to 15 RRUs in DC the RFC
scenarios

DBS5900 In a TMC11H (Ver.E) Depending on site

serving 7 to 21 RRUs requirements

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-127 Installation positions of DCDU-12Bs

● The following table lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables.

Table 1-15 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables

Base Applicati Wire Color Cross- Connector/

Statio on Sectional Terminal
n Scenario Area
Most One
Regions/UK/ End/The
China Other End

BTS390 AC RTN(+ Black/ 25 mm2 OT terminal

0A ) Blue/Red (0.039 in.2), (M6)/OT
(Ver.D) one group terminal
NEG(- Blue/Gray/ (M6)
) Blue

DC RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
in.2 (low Depending
smoke on the
zero external
equipment

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Applicati Wire Color Cross- Connector/

Statio on Sectional Terminal
n Scenario Area
Most One
Regions/UK/ End/The
China Other End

NEG(- Blue/Gray/ halogen),

) Blue one group
● 16 mm2
or 0.025
in.2, two
groups

BTS390 DC RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

0A ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
(Ver.E) in.2 (low Depending
smoke on the
zero external
halogen), equipment
one group
NEG(- Blue/Gray/ OT terminal
) Blue ● 16 mm2 (M6)/
or 0.025 Depending
in.2, two on the
groups external
equipment

DBS39 In an RTN(+ Black/ 25 mm2 OT terminal

00 APM30H ) Blue/Red (0.039 in.2), (M6)/
(Ver.D) one group Depending
serving 7 NEG(- Blue/Gray/ on the
to 12 ) Blue external
RRUs equipment

● In a RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

TMC1 ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
1H in.2 (low Depending
(Ver.D NEG(- Blue/Gray/ on the
smoke
) ) Blue external
zero
servin halogen), equipment
g 7 to one group
12
RRUs ● 16 mm2
or 0.025
● In a in.2, two
TMC1 groups
1H
(Ver.E)
servin
g 7 to
21
RRUs

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-16 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables

Base Applicati Wire Color Cross- Connector/
Statio on Sectional Terminal
n Scenario Area
Most One
Regions/UK/ End/The
China Other End

BTS590 DC RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

0A ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
in.2 (low Depending
smoke on the
zero external
halogen), equipment
one group
NEG(- Blue/Gray/ OT terminal
) Blue ● 16 mm2 (M6)/
or 0.025 Depending
in.2, two on the
groups external
equipment

DBS59 In a RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

00 TMC11H ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
(Ver.E) in.2 (low Depending
serving 7 NEG(- Blue/Gray/ on the
smoke
to 21 ) Blue external
zero
RRUs halogen), equipment
one group
● 16 mm2
or 0.025
in.2, two
groups

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the four M6 screws from both sides of the slot housing the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-128 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of a DCDU-12B

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure.

1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the
mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2. Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.70
lbf·in.).

Figure 1-129 Installing a DCDU-12B

(1) DCDU-12B (2) Cable claw

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Prepare the DCDU-12B power cable.

1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add connectors to both ends of the cable.

Table 1-17 Connectors for the cable

Base Station Application Power Method of
Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

BTS3900A AC EPU05A-02/04 Add connectors

(Ver.D) to both ends of
the power cable
according to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.

BTS3900A DC External power Add new OT

(Ver.D) equipment terminals to one
end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

BTS3900A (Ver.E) DC External power Add new OT

equipment terminals to one
end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Station Application Power Method of

Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

DBS3900 In an APM30H EPU05A-03/05 Add connectors

(Ver.D) serving 7 to both ends of
to 12 RRUs the power cable
according to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.

In a TMC11H External power Add new OT

(Ver.D) serving 7 equipment terminals to one
to 12 RRUs end of the power
cable according
In a TMC11H to the
(Ver.E) serving 7 instructions in
to 21 RRUs Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

Table 1-18 Connectors for the cable

Base Station Application Power Method of
Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

BTS5900A DC External power Add new OT

equipment terminals to one
end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Station Application Power Method of

Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

DBS5900 In a TMC11H External power Add new OT

(Ver.E) serving 7 equipment terminals to one
to 21 RRUs end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

Step 5 Install the DCDU-12B power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the protective cover for the terminals of the DC input power cable
from the DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable
to the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12B and tighten the screw on the OT
terminal to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the protective cover, and use the screwdriver to tighten the screw on
the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding port on the
power equipment, as described in the following table.

Table 1-19 Cable connections

Base Station Application Power Installation
Scenario Equipment Position

BTS3900A AC EPU05A-02/04 DC output

(Ver.D) terminal "RFC2"
on the EPU in
the APM30H,
requiring a
torque of 4.8
N·m (42.48
lbf·in.)

DC External power Corresponding

equipment port on the
external power
equipment

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Station Application Power Installation

Scenario Equipment Position

BTS3900A (Ver.E) DC External power Corresponding

equipment port on the
external power
equipment

DBS3900 In an APM30H EPU05A-03/05 DC output

(Ver.D) serving 7 terminal "RFC1"
to 12 RRUs on the EPU in
the APM30H,
requiring a
torque of 4.8
N·m (42.48
lbf·in.)

In a TMC11H External power Corresponding

(Ver.D) serving 7 equipment port on the
to 12 RRUs external power
equipment
In a TMC11H External power
(Ver.E) serving 7 equipment
to 21 RRUs

Table 1-20 Cable connections

Base Station Application Power Installation
Scenario Equipment Position

BTS5900A DC External power Corresponding

equipment port on the
external power
equipment

DBS5900 In a TMC11H External power Corresponding

(Ver.E) serving 7 equipment port on the
to 21 RRUs external power
equipment

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-130 Installing DCDU-12B power cables (Ver.D)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-131 Installing DCDU-12B power cables (Ver.E)

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.8 Installing a DCDU16D

When a base station is configured with high-power RRUs, a DCDU16D is required.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
NOTE

One DCDU16D can distribute power for three RRUs (power consumption per RRU ≤ 1400 W).

The following table lists the DCDU16D configuration principles.

Table 1-21 Configuration principles

Base Station Type Cabinet Application Policy

DBS5900 ● TMC11H (Ver.E) Install a DCDU16D.

● TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D)

● APM30H (Ver.E)
● APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

DBS3900 ● TMC11H (Ver.E) Install a DCDU16D.

● TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D)

● APM30H (Ver.E)
● APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

● TMC11H (Ver.D)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_C)

● APM30H (Ver.D)
● APM30H (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H (Ver.D_C)

The following figures show installation positions.

Figure 1-132 Installation positions

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-133 Installation positions

(1) DCDU16D

The following table lists the specifications of power cables.

NOTE

Table 1-22 Specifications of power cables

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power
Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

DBS5900 ● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-07

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-09
● APM30 groups
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

● TMC11 25 mm2 OT Depending External

H (0.039 in. terminal on the power
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) external equipment
● TMC11 groups equipment
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

DBS3900 ● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-07

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-09
● APM30 groups
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-03

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.D) 2), one (M6) (M6) EPU05A-05
● APM30 group
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● APM30
H
(Ver.D_C
)

● TMC11 25 mm2 OT Depending External

H (0.039 in. terminal on the power
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) external equipment
● TMC11 groups equipment
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_C
)

Procedure
Step 1 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU16D, as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-134 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU16D

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 2 Put the DCDU16D into the installation position. Then, use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU16D
with the recommended torque of 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-135 Installing a DCDU16D

Step 3 Install DCDU16D input power cables.

1. Add OT terminals to the power cables on the DCDU16D side according to the
instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
connector at the other end depends on site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the DCDU16D, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU16D. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten
the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

4. Reinstall the protective cover on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-136 Installing the DCDU16D input power cables

Step 4 Optional: Install the DCDU16D input power cables in an APM30H (Ver.D)/
APM30H (Ver.D_C)/APM30H (Ver.D_B).
1. Add OT terminals to both ends of the DCDU16D input power cables by
following the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the DCDU16D, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the DCDU16D input power cables to the RFC1 or
RFC2 power terminals on the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, or
EPU05A-05, and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-137 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03,

EPU05A-04, or EPU05A-05

Step 5 Optional: In an APM30H (Ver.E)/APM30H (Ver.E_B~D), install PDU01D-01

modules in slots 8 and 9 in the EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or
EPU05A-09.
1. Add OT terminals to both ends of the DCDU16D input power cables by
following the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the DCDU16D, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the DCDU16D input power cables to the
PDU01D-01 modules and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-138 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07,

EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.9 Installing an EPU02D/EPU02D-02

When a base station is configured with high-power RRUs and requires voltage
boosting power distribution, an EPU02D or EPU02D-02 must be installed.

Context
NOTE

● An EPU02D/EPU02D-02 can be configured with a maximum of two BDU65-03s (shortened

to BDU in this section).
● An EPU02D can provide voltage boosting power distribution for six RRUs (power
consumption per RRU ≤ 800 W).
● An EPU02D-02 can provide voltage boosting power distribution for three RRUs (power
consumption per RRU ≤ 1200 W).
● The EPU02D and EPU02D-02 installation methods are the same. This section uses the
EPU02D-02 as an example.

The following table lists the EPU02D or EPU02D-02 configuration principles.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-23 Configuration principles

Base Station Type Cabinet Application Policy

BTS3900A ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D) EPU02D-02 is installed.

● APM30H (Ver.E)
● APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

● APM30H (Ver.D)
● APM30H (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H (Ver.D_C)
● TMC11H (Ver.D)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_C)

DBS3900 ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D) EPU02D-02 is installed.

● APM30H (Ver.E)
● APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

● TMC11H (Ver.D)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_C)

● APM30H (Ver.D)
● APM30H (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H (Ver.D_C)

Table 1-24 Configuration principles

Base Station Type Cabinet Application Policy

BTS5900A ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● APM30H (Ver.E) EPU02D-02 is installed.

DBS5900 ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● APM30H (Ver.E) EPU02D-02 is installed.

The following figures show installation positions.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-139 Installation positions

Figure 1-140 Installation positions

The following table lists the specifications of power cables.

NOTE

Table 1-25 Power cable specifications

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

BTS3900A ● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-06

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-08
● APM30 groups
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-02

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.D) 2), one (M6) (M6) EPU05A-04
● APM30 group
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● APM30
H
(Ver.D_C
)

● TMC11 25 mm2 OT Depending External

H (0.039 in. terminal on the power
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) external equipment
● TMC11 groups equipment
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_C
)

DBS3900 ● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-07

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-09
● APM30 groups
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-03

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.D) 2), one (M6) (M6) EPU05A-05
● APM30 group
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● APM30
H
(Ver.D_C
)

● TMC11 25 mm2 OT Depending External

H (0.039 in. terminal on the power
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) external equipment
● TMC11 groups equipment
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_C
)

Table 1-26 Power cable specifications

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power
Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

BTS5900A APM30H 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-06

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-08
groups

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

TMC11H 25 mm2 OT Depending External

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal on the power
2), two (M6) external equipment
groups equipment

DBS5900 APM30H 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-07

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-09
groups

TMC11H 25 mm2 OT Depending External

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal on the power
2), two (M6) external equipment
groups equipment

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: After an EPU02D-02 is installed, remove the DCDU that is not in use.
1. Turn off the circuit breaker of the equipment supplying power for the DCDU.
2. Record all cable connections on the DCDU, and remove the cables.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from both sides of
the DCDU, and gently pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
4. Place the removed DCDU in an ESD box or bag.

Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02D-02, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-141 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of an EPU02D-02

(1) Double-sided tape

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 3 Put the EPU02D-02 into the installation position. Then, use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears on both sides of the EPU02D-02
with the recommended torque of 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-142 Installing an EPU02D-02

Step 4 Optional: Install the second BDU in slot 2 of the EPU02D-02 as required.
NOTE

An EPU02D-02 has been configured with two BDUs before delivery. Therefore, skip this step for
an EPU02D-02.
1. Remove the corresponding filler panel.
2. Release the buckle on the upper right corner of the BDU, and rotate the
handle outwards.
3. Gently slide the BDU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
4. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.

Figure 1-143 Installing a BDU

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 5 Install EPU02D-02 input power cables.

1. Add OT terminals to one end of the cables on the EPU02D-02 side according
to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
connector at the other end depends on site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the EPU02D-02, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals on the EPU02D-02. Use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover of the EPU02D-02, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-144 Installing EPU02D-02 input power cables

NOTE

– Add OT terminals to the power cables according to the instructions in Assembling the
OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
– The cable diagram on the top of the EPU02D/EPU02D-02 protection cover is used for
preparing an output power cable connected to an EPC4/EPC5/EPC11 connector.

Step 6 Optional: In the APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_C), or APM30H (Ver.D_B),

connect the other end of the EPU02D input power cables to the RFC1 or RFC2

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

power supply port on the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, or EPU05A-05, as

shown in the following figure. Then, tighten the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48
lbf·in.).

Figure 1-145 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04,

or EPU05A-05

Step 7 Optional: In the APM30H (Ver.E), configure the PDU01D-01 in slots 8 and 9 in the
EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 and connect the EPU02D input
power cables to the PDU01D-01, as shown in the following figure. Then, tighten
the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-146 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08,

or EPU05A-09

Step 8 Optional: Install the EPU02D-02 alarm cable, as shown in the following figure.

Table 1-27 Installing the alarm cable

Installatio One End The Other End Illustratio
n Scenario n
Installatio Connector Installation Connect
n Position Position or

Connected COM_IN RJ45 ● MON1-0/ RJ45 Figure

to the BBU port on the connector D_COM1- connecto 1-147
of EPU02D 0 port on r
SRAN12.1 the FAN
or a later 02E
version ● MON1-0/
D_COM1-
0 port on
the
FAN02H

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Installatio One End The Other End Illustratio

n Scenario n
Installatio Connector Installation Connect
n Position Position or

Connected ALM_ALL White and EXT_ALM0 or RJ45 Figure

to the BBU port on the orange EXT_ALM1 connecto 1-148
of EPU02D bare wire port on the r
SRAN12.0 BBU
or an
earlier
version

Connected ALM_ALL White and Depending Dependi -

to external port on the orange on the ng on
monitoring EPU02D bare wire external the
devices equipment external
equipme
nt

NOTE

The types and installation positions of the cables installed on the FAN02H are similar to
those of cables installed on the FAN 02E. The following figures use the FAN 02E as an
example.

Figure 1-147 Installing the alarm cable (SRAN12.1 or later)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-148 Installing the alarm cable (SRAN12.0 or earlier)

Step 9 Optional: When the monitoring port on the fan assembly is occupied, connect the
RJ45 connector at one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the EPU02D-02,
and the RJ45 connector at the other end to the "MON1" port on the BBU, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-149 Installing the alarm cable

Step 10 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 11 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.10 Installing an EPU02B/EPU02S

When high-power RRUs are configured and voltage boosting power distribution is
required, an EPU02B or EPU02S can be installed in a 19-inch rack.

Context
● An EPU02B can be configured with a maximum of two BDU70-03s.
● An EPU02S can be configured with a maximum of two dynamic voltage
boosting SDU60-02s.
● One EPU02B can provide voltage boosting power distribution for six RRUs
(power consumption per RRU < 1200 W).
● One EPU02S can provide voltage boosting power distribution for three RRUs
(power consumption per RRU ≤ 1400 W).
NOTE

A BDU refers to a BDU70-03 and an SDU refers to an SDU60-02 in this section.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

For the configuration principles of the EPU02B, see EPU02B. For the configuration
principles of the EPU02S, see EPU02S.
The following figure shows the installation positions of an EPU02B/EPU02S.

Figure 1-150 Installation positions of the power distribution box in 3900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02B/EPU02S

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-151 Installation positions of the power distribution box in 5900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02B/EPU02S

The following table lists the specifications of EPU02B/EPU02S power cables.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-28 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 3900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Connector Power
Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

BTS390 ● BTS3900 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 (Ver.D) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900 in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_A~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS390 ● BTS3900L OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0L (Ver.D) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900L in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

● BTS3 ● APM30H OT terminal (M6, OT terminal EPU05A-02/0

900A (Ver.D) 25 mm2 or 0.039 (M6) 4
● DBS3 ● APM30H in.2 for one group)
900 (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H
(Ver.D_C)

● TMC11H OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

(Ver.F_B~E) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● TMC11H in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E) or 25 mm2 or
● TMC11H 0.039 in.2 for two
(Ver.E_B~D) groups)
● TMC11H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11H
(Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H
(Ver.D_C)

DBS390 OMB (Ver.C) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 16 mm2 or 0.025 the external power
in.2 for two equipment equipment
groups)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Connector Power

Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

IMB03 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

IMB05 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

INS12 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

depending on the the external power
external equipment equipment
equipment)

ILC29 (Ver.E) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS390 BTS3900AL OT terminal (M6, Depending on ETP48400 or

0AL 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external external
in.2 for one group equipment power
or 25 mm2 or equipment
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-29 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 5900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Connector Power
Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

BTS590 ● BTS5900 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 (Ver.A) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900 in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_A~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS590 ● BTS5900L OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0L (Ver.A) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900L in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS590 ● TMC11H OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0A (Ver.F_B~E) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
DBS590 ● TMC11H in.2 for one group equipment equipment
0 (Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
● TMC11H 0.039 in.2 for two
(Ver.E) groups)

DBS590 IMB05 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

INS12 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

depending on the the external power
external equipment equipment
equipment)

ILC29 (Ver.E) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Connector Power

Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

APM5930(DC) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

NOTE

● In most regions except the UK and China, the RTN(+) cable is black and the NEG(-)
cable is blue.
● In the UK, the RTN(+) cable is blue and the NEG(-) cable is gray.
● In China, the RTN(+) cable is red and the NEG(-) cable is blue.

Procedure
Step 1 After an EPU02B/EPU02S is installed, remove the DCDU that is not in use.
1. Turn off the circuit breaker of the equipment supplying power to the DCDU.
2. Record all cable connections on the DCDU, and remove the cables.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from both sides of
the DCDU, and gently pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
4. Place the removed DCDU in an ESD box or bag.
Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02B/EPU02S, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-152 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02B

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-153 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02S

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 3 Place the EPU02B/EPU02S at the installation position. Then, use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears on both sides with
the recommended torque of 2 N·m or 17.70 lbf·in. (EPU02B)/3 N·m or 26.55 lbf·in.
(EPU02S), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-154 Installing an EPU02B

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-155 Installing an EPU02S

Step 4 If a second BDU is required, install the second BDU in slot 2 of the EPU02B as
required.
1. Remove the filler panel from slot 2 of the EPU02B.
2. Release the buckle on the upper right corner of the BDU, and rotate the
handle outwards.
3. Gently slide the BDU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
4. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.

Figure 1-156 Installing a BDU

Step 5 Install input power cables of the EPU02B/EPU02S.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1. Prepare OT terminals on the EPU02B/EPU02S side by referring to Assembling

the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The connector at the other end
depends on site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the EPU02B/EPU02S, and then remove the
protective cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals of the EPU02B/EPU02S, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M6 screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the EPU02B/EPU02S protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-157 Installing input power cables of the EPU02B

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-158 Installing input power cables of the EPU02S

Step 6 In an APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.D_C)/APM30H (Ver.D_B), connect the other

end of the EPU02B/EPU02S input power cables to the RFC1 or RFC2 power supply
port on the EPU05A-02/03/04/05 with a torque of 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-159 Installing EPU02B power cables to the EPU05A-02/03/04/05

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-160 Installing EPU02S power cables to the EPU05A-02/03/04/05

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 8 Attach labels to the installed cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Cable-Tying Label.

----End

1.13.11 Installing an EPU02S-02

When high-power RRUs are configured and voltage boosting power distribution is
required, an EPU02S-02 can be installed in a 19-inch rack.

Context
● An EPU02S-02 supports only one SDU60-02 and one SDU30-01. Both
SDU60-02 and SDU30-01 are dynamic voltage boosting modules.
● An EPU02S-02 can provide voltage boosting power distribution for three RRUs
(power consumption per RRU ≤ 1400 W).
For details about the configuration principles of the EPU02S-02, see EPU02S-02.
The following figure shows the installation positions of an EPU02S-02.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-161 Installation positions of the power distribution boxes in 3900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02S-02

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-162 Installation positions of the power distribution boxes in 5900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02S-02

The following table lists the specifications of EPU02S-02 power cables.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-30 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 3900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Connector Power
Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

BTS3900 ● BTS3900 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

(Ver.D) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900 in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_A~D or 25 mm2 or
) 0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS3900L ● BTS3900L OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

(Ver.D) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900L in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

● BTS390 ● APM30H OT terminal (M6, OT terminal EPU05A-02/

0A (Ver.D) 25 mm2 or 0.039 (M6) 04
● DBS39 ● APM30H in.2 for one group)
00 (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H
(Ver.D_C)

● TMC11H OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

DBS3900 IMB03 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Connector Power

Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

IMB05 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

INS12 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

depending on the the external power
external equipment equipment
equipment)

ILC29 (Ver.E) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS3900A BTS3900AL OT terminal (M6, Depending on ETP48400 or

L 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external external
in.2 for one group equipment power
or 25 mm2 or equipment
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Table 1-31 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 5900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Connector Power
Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

BTS5900 ● BTS5900 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

(Ver.A) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900 in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_A~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Connector Power

Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

BTS5900L ● BTS5900L OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

(Ver.A) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900L in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS5900A ● TMC11H OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

DBS5900 (Ver.F_B~E) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● TMC11H in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
● TMC11H 0.039 in.2 for two
(Ver.E) groups)

DBS5900 IMB05 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

INS12 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

depending on the the external power
external equipment equipment
equipment)

ILC29 (Ver.E) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

APM5930(DC) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 After an EPU02S-02 is installed, remove the DCDU that is not in use.
1. Turn off the circuit breaker of the equipment supplying power for the DCDU.
2. Record all cable connections on the DCDU, and remove the cables.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from both sides of
the DCDU, and gently pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
4. Place the removed DCDU in an ESD box or bag.
Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02S-02, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-163 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02S-02

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 3 Put the EPU02S-02 into the installation position. Then, use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears on both sides with the
recommended torque of 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-164 Installing an EPU02S-02

Step 4 Install input power cables of the EPU02S-02.

1. Prepare OT terminals on the EPU02S-02 side by referring to Assembling the
OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The connector at the other end depends on
site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the EPU02S-02, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals of the EPU02S-02, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the EPU02S-02 protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding ports on the
power equipment.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-165 Installing input power cables of the EPU02S-02

Step 5 Optional: In an APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.D_C)/APM30H (Ver.D_B), connect

the other end of the EPU02S-02 input power cables to the RFC1 or RFC2 power
supply port on the EPU05A-02/03/04/05 with a torque of 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.),
as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-166 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-02/03/04/05

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 7 Attach labels to the installed cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Cable-Tying Label.

----End

1.13.12 Installing the GPS Surge Protector

The GPS surge protector can be installed at a site to provide surge protection for
GPS signals.

Context
A satellite card needs to be installed onsite only for a USCU that supports two
satellite cards. To install a satellite card, perform steps 1 to 3.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Loosen the two M3 screws on the panel of the USCU and pull it out, as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-167 Removing the USCU

Step 2 Optional: Install a satellite card on the USCU, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the three M1.6 screws on the USCU.
2. Place the satellite card on the USCU, aligning the mounting holes on the
satellite card with the bolts on the USCU.
3. Use the three M1.6 screws removed in step a to secure the satellite card, and
tighten the screws to 0.1 N·m (0.89 lbf·in.).
4. Connect one end of the RF jumper for the satellite card to the RF port on the
satellite card, and connect the other end to the "GPS" port on the USCU.
NOTE

There are six mounting holes on the satellite card. You only need to install the three screws
shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-168 Installing a satellite card on the USCU

(1) Satellite card (2) RF jumper for the satellite card

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU equipped with the satellite card into the BBU, and
tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Step 4 Secure the GPS clock signal cable onto the support, and tighten the screws to 6.5
N·m (57.53 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-169 Securing the GPS clock signal cable onto the support

(1) GPS clock signal cable (2) Support

Step 5 Secure the support onto the inner left wall of the cabinet with a torque of 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-170 Securing the support onto the cabinet

Step 6 Optional: Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the "GPS" port on the USCU or
UMPT, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-171 Installing a GPS clock signal cable

Step 7 Use a torque wrench to secure the "Protect" port on the GPS surge protector onto
the type N50 straight female connector on one end of the GPS signal cable with a
torque of 4 N·m (35.40 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

● The UMPTg supports surge protection. Therefore, no GPS surge protector is required.
● The exterior of the GPS surge protector in this section is for reference only. The actual
exterior may be different.

Figure 1-172 Installing the GPS surge protector

(1) GPS surge protector

Step 8 Use a torque wrench to secure the GPS jumper to the "Surge" port on the GPS
surge protector with a torque of 4 N·m (35.40 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-173 Installing the GPS jumper

Step 9 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 10 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.
----End

1.13.13 Installing the DDF

The digital distribution frame (DDF) distributes alarm cables and E1/T1 cables.

Context
● The DDF is installed in the 1 U space reserved in the cabinet.
● In the digital distribution module, a, b, and s have different meanings.
– a and b indicate signal cables.
– s indicates a PGND cable.
● Alarm cables are routed on the left side of the DDF, and E1/T1 cables are
routed on the right side of the DDF. All cables are routed from the top down.
● The following procedure uses a twisted pair cable as an example. When
installing an E1 coaxial cable, install an insulation pad between the wiring
terminal and the DDF.

Procedure
Step 1 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the device side. This twisted pair
cable is connected to the BBU.
1. Insert the bare wires at one end of the twisted pair cable to the corresponding
digital distribution module according to the colors and labels of the wires.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

2. Use an impact tool to seat the wires of the twisted pair cable into the
terminal blocks on the DDF, as shown in Figure 1-174.

Step 2 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the cable side. This twisted pair
cable is connected to the peer equipment.
1. Insert the bare wires at one end of the twisted pair cable to the corresponding
digital distribution module according to the colors and labels of the wires.
2. Use an impact tool to seat the wires of the twisted pair cable into the
terminal blocks on the DDF, as shown in Figure 1-174.

Step 3 Arrange the wires on the DDF, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-174 Cabling on the DDF

NOTE

● After distributing cables on the DDF, ensure that no bare wire is exposed outside the
DDF.
● When interconnecting cables on both sides of the DDF, interconnect wires according to
actual situations. The colors of interconnected wires must be the same.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Perform required operations according to the type of a cabinet.

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Go to Step 5.

APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Go to Step 6.

Step 5 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler
module, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting
ear on each side of the filler module.
2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE

Figure 1-175 Removing the filler module

Step 6 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-176 Removing the air baffle

Step 7 Check whether floating nuts are installed on both sides of the 19-inch rack. If no,
install the floating nuts delivered with the DDF to both sides of the rack.

Step 8 Align the DDF with the cabinet, slide it into the cabinet, and use a screwdriver to
tighten four M6x12 screws on both sides of the DDF to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-177 Installing the DDF

----End

1.13.14 Installing Storage Batteries

This section describes the procedure for installing storage batteries in the
BBC5200T-L/IBBS200D/IBBS200T and IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

1.13.14.1 Installing Lithium Batteries in a BBC5200T-L

When an outdoor base station requires long-term backup power, install lithium
batteries and their cables in the lithium battery cabinet.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context

DANGER

● During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal
conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet.
● During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the
positive and negative poles of the storage batteries.
● All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of lead-acid
batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the power input and output switches for the lithium batteries are
turned off to avoid high current. The correct positions of the switches are shown
by "1" and "2" in the following figure.

Figure 1-178 Power switches for lithium batteries

(1) "BAT" circuit breaker on the panel of the (2) "BAT" circuit breaker on the power
EPU in the APM30H distribution box in the BBC5200T-L

Step 2 Adjust the mounting ears of a lithium battery before installing the lithium battery.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the six M4 screws from both sides of the
lithium battery, remove the mounting ears, move the mounting ears 60 mm (2.36
in.) backward, and reinstall the mounting ears on both sides of the lithium battery.
Tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-179 Adjusting the mounting ears of the lithium battery

Step 3 The lithium batteries should be installed along the guide rails in the sequence
indicated by the numbers in the following figure so that certain spacing is
reserved between the lithium batteries. Manually install the four M6 screws on the
mounting ears on both sides of each lithium battery, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten them to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.).
NOTE

A maximum of four 100 Ah lithium batteries can be installed in a BBC5200T-L based on site
conditions.

Figure 1-180 Installing lithium batteries

Step 4 Install PGND cables for lithium batteries. Connect the OT terminal (M6) at one
end of each PGND cable for the lithium battery to the ground point on the lithium
battery, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48
lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

One end of each PGND cable is connected to the BBC5200T-L cabinet before delivery. You only
need to connect the other end of each cable onsite.

Figure 1-181 Installing PGND cables for lithium batteries

Step 5 Install the power cables for the lithium batteries, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

One end of each lithium battery power cable is connected to the BBC5200T-L cabinet before
delivery. You only need to connect the other end of each cable onsite.
1. Remove the terminal covers from the poles of the lithium batteries.
2. Connect the OT terminal (M6) at one end of each black power cable to the
"-" end on the right of a lithium battery, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminal (M6) at one end of each red power cable to the "+"
end on the right of a lithium battery, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten
the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-182 Installing power cables for lithium batteries

Step 6 When installing an activation cable for the lithium battery, connect the 2-pin
connector on one end of the activation cable for the lithium battery to the
activation port ("PWR" port) on the lithium battery, as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE

● One end of each activation cable for the lithium battery is connected to the BBC5200T-L
cabinet before delivery. You only need to connect the other end of each cable onsite.
● When there are two or more 100 Ah lithium batteries in the BBC5200T-L, you only need to
install the activation cables for two lithium batteries from bottom to top. When there is only
one 100 Ah lithium battery in the BBC5200T-L, you only need to install an activation cable
for the lithium battery.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-183 Installing the activation cables for lithium batteries

Step 7 Install monitoring signal cables between cascaded lithium batteries in a single
cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE

● Connect the monitoring signal cables between cascaded lithium batteries from bottom to
top.
● When a single cabinet is used, install three monitoring signal cables between cascaded
lithium batteries for the BBC5200T-L in full configuration.
● In a stacked scenario, connect the "COM_OUT" port on the uppermost lithium battery in the
basic lithium battery cabinet to the "COM_IN" port on the lithium battery at the bottom of
the extension lithium battery cabinet.
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable
between cascaded lithium batteries to the "COM_OUT" port on the lithium
battery.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable
between cascaded lithium batteries to the "COM_IN" port on the upper
lithium battery.
3. After the monitoring signal cable between cascaded lithium batteries is
installed, install a build-out resistor on the "COM_OUT" port on the
uppermost lithium battery.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-184 Installing monitoring signal cables between cascaded lithium

batteries

----End

1.13.14.2 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to
install storage batteries and their power cables in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Prerequisites
The tools, such as a screwdriver and a pair of ESD gloves, are available.

Before installing a storage battery, check whether the voltage of the storage
battery is normal.
● The voltage of a 2 V storage battery ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
● The voltage of a 12 V storage battery ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.
● The total voltage of the 48 V storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.

Context

DANGER

● During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal
conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet.
● During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the
positive and negative poles of the batteries.
● All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of batteries
and to ensure personal safety.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage
batteries in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the power input and output switches for the storage batteries are
turned off to avoid high current. The correct positions of the switches are shown
by "1" and "2" in Figure 1-185.

Figure 1-185 Power switches for storage batteries

(1) "BAT" circuit breaker on the panel of the (2) "BAT_SW0" and "BAT_SW1" circuit breakers
EPU in the APM30H on the power distribution box in the battery
cabinet

Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in
Figure 1-186.
NOTE

The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is
reserved between the storage batteries.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-186 Installing storage batteries

Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 1-187.
1. Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.
2. Install copper bars between poles of neighboring storage batteries.
3. Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage
batteries. The black cable is connected to the negative pole, and the red cable
is connected to the positive pole.

Figure 1-187 Installing power cables for storage batteries

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

The following figure shows how the power cables are routed in the battery
cabinet.

Figure 1-188 Routing of power cables for storage batteries

----End

1.13.14.3 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to
install storage batteries and their power cables in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Prerequisites
Before installing a storage battery, check whether the voltage of the storage
battery is normal.
● The voltage of a 2 V storage battery ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
● The voltage of a 12 V storage battery ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.
● The total voltage of the 48 V storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
Ensure that the power input and output switches for the storage batteries are
turned off to avoid high current. The positions of the switches are shown in the
following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-189 Power switches for storage batteries

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-190 Power switches for storage batteries

Context

DANGER

Procedure
Step 1 Install storage batteries in the sequence shown in the following figure.
NOTE

The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is
reserved between the storage batteries.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-191 Installing storage batteries

Step 2 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.

1. Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the "NEG(-)"
terminal in the DC junction box in the inner left side of the battery cabinet,
and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the cable to the negative wiring
terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screw.
2. Connect the M6 OT terminal at one end of the red cable to the terminal on
the circuit breaker in the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). Connect the OT terminal at the
other end of the cable to the positive wiring terminal on the storage batteries,
and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw.
NOTE

The screws on the copper bars and wiring terminals of storage batteries are the same. There are
two types of screws: M6 and M8, with a torque of 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.) and 8 N·m (70.81
lbf·in.), respectively.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-192 Installing power cables for storage batteries

Step 3 Install copper bars between storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.
2. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries.

Figure 1-193 Installing copper bars for storage batteries

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Install the terminal covers onto the poles of the storage batteries.

----End

1.13.14.4 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T

When an outdoor base station requires the medium- to long-term backup power,
you need to configure one IBBS700D/IBBS700T and install storage batteries in the
IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Context
There are eight power cables for storage batteries. One end of the power cables
has already been connected to the power distribution box in the battery cabinet
before delivery. The installation personnel only need to connect the other end of
the power cables to the storage batteries onsite.

DANGER

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the "BAT" circuit breaker on the input power device has been turned
off to avoid an excessively large current.
Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in
the following figure.
NOTE
The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is
reserved between the storage batteries.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-194 Installing the storage batteries

Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE

Install all negative power cables for storage batteries before you install positive
power cables.

1. Remove the terminal covers on the electrodes of the storage batteries.

2. Install copper bars between the electrodes of neighboring storage batteries,
and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the copper bars.
3. Connect the M8 OT terminals at one end of the black wires to the BAT(-)
terminals on the power distribution box and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M8 screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.). Then connect the OT terminals
at the other end to the negative electrodes of the storage batteries and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.
4. Connect the M8 OT terminals at one end of the red wires to the BAT(+)
terminals on the power distribution box and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M8 screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.). Then connect the OT terminals
at the other end to the positive electrodes of the storage batteries and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.
5. Reinstall the terminal covers on the electrodes of the storage batteries.
NOTE

Copper bars between storage batteries and wiring terminals for storage batteries use the same
screws, which are either M6 or M8 screws. The torque used for M6 screws is 4.8 N·m (42.48
lbf·in.) and the torque used for M8 screws is 14 N·m (123.91 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-195 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.15 Installing the ODM06D

An ODM06D is required to provide power for RRUs. The ODM06D can be installed
on a mounting frame or pole.

1.13.15.1 Installing the ODM06D on a Mounting Frame

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the ODM06D
on the mounting frame on the cabinet side.

Context
● An ODM06D mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet,
or two ODM06D mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked
cabinets or both sides of a single cabinet. The method of installing ODM06D
mounting frames depends on the site space and the number of ODM06Ds to
be installed.
● An ODM06D mounting frame or two ODM06D mounting frames are
preferentially installed on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked
cabinets. If one or two ODM06D mounting frames are installed on the left

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets, only one ODM06D can be

installed on one of the two ODM06D mounting frames.
● When the mounting frames are installed on the left side of the cabinets and
two modules are installed side by side on the mounting frames, the angle of
the opened cabinet door cannot exceed 90°.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-196 Installing a mounting kit on the top

Step 2 Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use
a torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in
the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-197 Installing a mounting kit on the top

Step 3 Place the ODM06D mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two
M6x14 screws to secure the mounting frame onto the mounting kit on the top to
5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-198 Securing an ODM06D mounting frame to one side of the cabinet

NOTE

If two ODM06D mounting frames need to be installed on both sides of a single cabinet, the
second ODM06D mounting frame is installed on the other side of the cabinet.

Step 4 Optional: When cabinets are stacked, install a mounting frame on the lower
cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
1. Install the mechanical parts for jointing the upper and lower ODM06D
mounting frames onto the upper ODM06D mounting frame. Tighten four
M6x14 screws to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.).
2. Attach the second ODM06D mounting frame to the installed ODM06D
mounting frame. Tighten four M6x14 screws to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-199 Installing mechanical parts

Step 5 Install the attachment plates for the mounting frame at the bottom of the
cabinet. As listed in the following table, the installation procedure varies according
to the cabinet type.

If... Then...

● Scenario where a base for a Ver.A Step 6

cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.B
cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.C
cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.D
cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.E
cabinet is used

● Scenario where a base complying Step 7

with the American standard is
used
● Scenario where a base (with small
cable holes) complying with the
UK standard is used
● Scenario where a base (with large
cable holes) complying with the
UK standard is used

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 6 Optional: Install attachment plates for the mounting frames of bases for Ver.D,
Ver.A, Ver.B, Ver.C, and Ver.E cabinets.
1. Use five M6x14 screws to secure the attachment plate to the bottom of the
ODM06D mounting frame to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-200 Installing the attachment plates for bases of Ver.A/Ver.B/Ver.C/

Ver.D/Ver.E cabinets

2. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D attachment plate to the rear
of the base for the cabinet to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure. Skip this step in the scenario where a base for a Ver.A cabinet is used.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-201 Installing the attachment plates for bases of Ver.B/Ver.C/Ver.D/

Ver.E cabinets

Step 7 Optional: Install the UK-standard or American-standard attachment plates.

1. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the attachment plate to the bottom of the
ODM06D mounting frame to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-202 Installing the attachment plates for bases of UK-standard or

American-standard (1)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

2. Remove two screws from the cable hole, align the attachment plate with the
position where screws were installed, use four M6x14 screws to tighten the
attachment plate to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-203 Installing the attachment plates for bases of UK-standard or

American-standard (2)

(1) Scenario where a (2) Scenario where a (3) Scenario where a

base complying with the base (with small cable base (with large cable
American standard is holes) complying with holes) complying with
used the UK standard is used the UK standard is used

Step 8 Install the ODM06D.

1. Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D to 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-204 Installing mounting ears

2. Place the ODM06D on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D

mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

– If the ODM06D mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, the
ODM06D can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.
– If the ODM06D mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the
ODM06D can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.

Figure 1-205 Pre-securing the ODM06D

(1) Pre-securing part

3. Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D onto the ODM06D mounting
frame to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.). This is a recommended tightening torque.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-206 Securing the ODM06D

----End

1.13.15.2 Installing the ODM06D on a Pole

This section describes how to install the ODM06D on an outdoor pole.

Context
NOTE

● The diameter of a metal pole for installing an ODM06D should range from 48 mm to 114
mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.).
● The maximum distance between the pole and the APM30H is 2.5 m (98.43 in.). The
maximum length of the power cable between the ODM06D and the APM30H is 6 m (236.22
in.).

An ODM06D is installed with the ports at the bottom, as shown in the following
figure

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-207 Correct installation of an ODM06D

Procedure
Step 1 Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D to 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-208 Installing mounting ears

Step 2 Put the hose clamp through the holes in the middle of the mounting kit.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 3 Place the ODM06D to the installation position, circle the hose clamp around the
pole, put the steel strip of the hose clamp through the locking head (as shown by
illustration 1 in the following figure), press the screw on a proper position to
partially tighten it, and use an M6 inner hexagon screwdriver to tighten the screw
to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

When tightening the hose clamp, you need to be close to the ODM06D to prevent the ODM06D
from falling.

Figure 1-209 Securing the ODM06D

----End

1.13.15.3 Installing a PGND Cable for an ODM06D

A PGND cable connects an ODM06D and an external ground bar to ensure proper
grounding of the cabinet.

Context
The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable for an ODM06D.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-32 Specifications of a PGND cable

Cable Application Cross-Sectional Color
Scenario Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal

PGND ODM06D OT terminal (M6) at Green and yellow

cable one end connecting
to a cable with a
cross-sectional area
of 16 mm2 (0.025
in.2) and cord end
terminal at the
other end

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add an OT terminal and a cord end terminal at the ends of a PGND cable
according to the instructions in Installing the Cord End Terminal and Installing
the OT Terminal.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Partially loosen the bolt on the PG connector for the PGND cable so that a
cable can go through the PG connector.
2. Route the PGND cable for the ODM06D through the PG connector.
3. Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminal onto the
terminal block to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.), which is a recommended torque.
4. Use the cable clip to secure the cable and tighten the M4 screw on the cable
clip to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.) to ensure that the cable clip closely contacts
with the shield layer of the cable. The 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.) value is a
recommended torque.
5. Secure the PG connector of the cable.

NOTICE

Tighten the PG connector to protect the device from water damage.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-210 Installing the PGND cable for an ODM06D

Step 3 Connect the other end of the PGND cable for the ODM06D to the external ground
bar.

----End

1.13.16 Installing an HAU01A-01

This section describes the procedure for installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS700D
and IBBS300D.

1.13.16.1 Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS700D

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the HAU01A-01
and its related cables.

Context
The mounting ears and M4 countersunk screws for the heater are placed in an
accessory bag that is located at the bottom of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Use M4 countersunk screws to secure the mounting ears to the HAU01A-01, and
then use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.),
as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-211 Installing the mounting ears

Step 2 Install the HAU01A-01 in the corresponding slot in the cabinet, and use an M6
torque screwdriver to tighten the four M6x12 screws on the HAU01A-01 to 3 N·m
(26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-212 Installing the heater

Step 3 Install the HAU01A-01 power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws on the cover plate of the
AC junction box, and then open the cover plate.
2. Connect the C13 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the
AC_IN port on the HAU01A-01.
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, green and
yellow wires of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the L0, N0, and PE terminals
in the AC junction box, respectively. Then use an M4 torque screwdriver to
tighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the cover plate of the junction box, and use an M3 torque
screwdriver to tighten the screws on the cover plate to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-213 Installing the HAU01A-01 power cable

Step 4 Install the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable.

1. Connect the bare wires at the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal
cable to the ALM_ALL port on the HAU01A-01, as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE

One end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable has been connected to the IN0
port on the CMUEA or CMUF before delivery.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-214 Installing the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable

2. Optional: In the scenario where the battery cabinet is used with the
BTS3900AL or TP48600A and configured with a CCU, connect the RJ45
connector at the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the
COM_IN port on the HAU01A-01, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

One end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable has been connected to the
D_COM3 port on the CCU before delivery.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-215 Installing the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements.

Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.13.16.2 Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS300D

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an HAU01A-01
and its cables in the IBBS300D.

Context
The mounting ears and M4 countersunk screws of the heater are packed in an
accessory bag that is bound to the bottom of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Use M4 recessed pan head screws to secure mounting ears onto the heater, and
use a screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-216 Installing the mounting ears for the heater

Step 2 Install the heater on the front door, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screws to
1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-217 Installing the heater

Step 3 Install the HAU01A-01 power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plate of the
junction box. Then open the cover plate.
2. Connect the C13 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the
"AC_IN" port on the heater.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and
yellow wires in the HAU01A-01 power cable to the "L0", "N0", and "PE"
terminals in the junction box and use a screwdriver to tighten the screws to
1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

4. Install the cover plate of the junction box and use a screwdriver to tighten the
screws on the cover plate to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-218 Installing an HAU01A-01 power cable

Step 4 Install the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal
cable to the "COM_IN" port on the HAU01A-01.
2. Connect the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the
"D_COM0" port on the CCU01D-03.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-219 Installing an HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14 Installing Cables

This section describes external cables and cables for mandatory components.

1.14.1 Cabling Requirements

Cables must be routed according to specified cabling requirements to prevent
signal interference.

NOTE

If a cable listed below is not required, skip the cabling requirements of the cable.

General Cabling Requirements

Bending radius requirements
● The bending radius of a 7/8'' feeder must be greater than 250 mm (9.84 in.),
and the bending radius of a 5/4'' feeder must be greater than 380 mm (14.96
in.).
● The bending radius of a 1/4'' jumper must be greater than 35 mm (1.38 in.).
The bending radius of a super-flexible 1/2'' jumper must be greater than 50
mm (1.97 in.), and the bending radius of an ordinary 1/2'' jumper must be
greater than 127 mm (5 in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● The bending radius of a power cable or PGND cable must be at least three
times the cable diameter.
● The bending radius of an optical fiber is at least 20 times its diameter, and the
bending radius of a breakout cable is at least 30 mm (1.18 in.).
● The bending radius of an E1/T1 cable must be at least three times its
diameter.
● The bending radius of a signal cable must be at least five times its diameter.
Cable binding requirements
● Cables must be bound before being routed out of the equipment.
● Cables of the same type must be bound together.
● Different types of cables must be separately routed and bound.
● The cables must be bound tightly and neatly. The sheaths of the cables must
not be damaged.
● The cable ties must face the same direction, and those at the same horizontal
line must be in a straight line.
● The excess of the indoor cable ties needs to be cut off. A 5 mm (0.20 in.)
excess needs to be reserved for each outdoor cable tie, without any sharp
edges.
● After cables are installed, labels or nameplates must be attached to the cables
at their ends, curves, and interconnection positions.
Security requirements
● When routing cables, avoid sharp objects or sharp edges on the wall. If
necessary, use tubes to protect the cables.
● When routing cables, keep the cables away from heat sources and use heat
insulation materials to insulate the cables from the heat sources.
● Reserve a proper distance (0.1 m or 0.33 ft is recommended) between
equipment and cables, especially at the cable curves to protect the cables and
equipment.
Indoor cabling requirements
● Cables are routed indoors through the feeder window.
● Reserve drip loops for all cables outside the feeder window before routing
them into the room. Ensure that the radiuses of the drip loops are greater
than or equal to the minimum bending radiuses of the cables.
● When routing a cable into the room, ensure that a person is assisting you in
the room.
● Apply waterproof treatment to the feeder window.

Outdoor Cabling Requirements

● After being connected to a ground clip on power cables, a ground cable must
be routed downwards to prevent water from entering the equipment to which
the power cables connect.
● Protect outdoor cables against potential damage. For example, put the cables
through tubes.
● The cables to be protected include AC power cables, transmission cables, and
cables routed underground.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● When routing cables through tubes on the ground below the cabinet, put a
30 mm to 50 mm (1.18 in. to 1.97 in.) length of the tubes into the base of the
cabinet but do not put the tubes into the cabinet. Use waterproof tape or
waterproof silicon gel to block both ends of the tubes and use sheet metal
tabs to secure the tubes to the cable holes in the base.
● When routing cables through tubes along a metal cable trough below the
cabinet, do not put the tubes into the base of the cabinet but cover the cable
trough and connect the tubes to the cable holes in the base.
● When routing RRU/AAU cables, ensure that the highest positions of the routes
of all cables (except RF cables and AISG cables) are lower than the bottom of
the module. This prevents water from entering the maintenance cavity of the
module along the cables.
● Use clips to secure cables outdoors. For the method of installing a clip, see the
installation guide delivered with the clip.
● Arrange cables neatly along the routing direction and use clips to secure the
cables.
● Determine the positions where the clips are installed according to the actual
situation. For example, 7/8" feeders are secured with clips at an interval of 1.5
m to 2 m (4.92 ft to 6.56 ft), CPRI/Ir optical fibers and power cables are
secured with clips at an interval of 1 m to 1.5 m (3.28 ft to 4.92 ft). Ensure
that the clips are evenly spaced and face the same direction.
● When fastening cables with a clip, ensure that the cables are aligned neatly
and are routed through the holes in the clip. Do not stretch the cables too
tightly.
● Cable ties are used to assist in binding cables. One cable tie can bind a
maximum of two cables.
There are two types of clips which are described as follows:
● A 3-hole clip is shown by illustration a in the following figure. It is often used
to fasten feeders.
● A 6-hole clip is shown by illustration b in the following figure. It is often used
to fasten power cables and CPRI/Ir optical fibers.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 12 AWG/4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)/10 AWG, or the power cable has
non-round core wires with the cross-sectional area of 12 AWG/4 mm2
(0.006 in.2)/10 AWG/6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG/7 AWG, the 6-hole clip
does not require the removal of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a
power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–8.3 mm2 (0.005–0.013 in.2)
RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG, or the power cable has non-round
core wires with the cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 (0.016 in.2), the 6-
hole clip requires the removal of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a
power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–8.3 mm2 (0.005–0.013 in.2)
RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 12 AWG/4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)/10 AWG, or the power cable has
non-round core wires with the cross-sectional area of 12 AWG/4 mm2
(0.006 in.2)/10 AWG/6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG/7 AWG/5 AWG, the 6-

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

hole clip does not require the removal of the rubber tube in the cable
hole for a power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–10 mm2 (0.005–0.016
in.2) RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG/10 mm2 (0.016 in.2), or the power
cable has non-round core wires with the cross-sectional area of 16 mm2
(0.025 in.2), the 6-hole clip requires the removal of the rubber tube in the
cable hole for a power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–10 mm2
(0.005–0.016 in.2) RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 6 AWG/16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), the 6-hole clip does not require the
removal of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a power cable. The 6-
hole clip matches 13.3–25 mm2 (0.021–0.039 in.2) RRU/AAU power
cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 4 AWG/25 mm2 (0.039 in.2), the 6-hole clip requires the removal
of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a power cable. The 6-hole clip
matches 13.3–25 mm2 (0.021–0.039 in.2) RRU/AAU power cables.

Figure 1-220 Exterior of the clips

(1) Cable hole for a (2) Cable hole for a (3) Cable hole for a (4) Rubber tube
feeder CPRI/Ir optical fiber power cable

The following figure shows the cables secured on a cable tray.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-221 Cables secured on a cable tray

(a) 3-hole clip (b) 6-hole clip

The following figure shows the cables secured on a tower.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-222 Cables secured on a tower

(a) 3-hole clip (b) 6-hole clip

Special Cabling Requirements

Cabling of power cables
● Power cables must be installed in the position specified in engineering design
documents.
● If the length of a cable cannot meet the requirement, replace the cable rather
than adding connectors or soldering joints to lengthen the cables.
● Cables can only be routed under well-planned instructions. The cabling
activities are allowed only when qualified personnel and communication
facilities are available.
● Do not circle or twist cables.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● After routing a DC power cable onto the platform on a tower, route it along
the shortest path to the rails surrounding the platform, and route it along the
inside of the rails.
● After routing a DC power cable close to the equipment on a tower, use clips
to secure the power cable onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform.
Ensure the position where the power cable is secured is less than 1.5 m (4.92
ft) away from the equipment to which the power cable connects.
Cabling of PGND cables
● PGND cables for a base station must be connected to the same group of
ground bars.
● PGND cables cannot be routed overhead outdoors. All PGND cables must be
buried in the ground or laid out indoors.
● The external conductor of the coaxial wire and the shield layer of the shielded
cable must have proper electrical contact with the metal surface of the
equipment to which they are connected.
● PGND cables and signal cables must be installed with a certain distance
reserved between them to prevent interference from each other.
● Switches or fuses must not be installed on the PGND cables.
● Other devices must not be used for electrical connections of the PGND cables.
● All the metal parts in the housing of the equipment must be reliably
connected to the ground terminal.
Cabling of E1 cables
● E1 cables cannot be crossed with power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables
when being laid out. If transmission cables are routed with power cables,
PGND cables, or RF cables in parallel, the spacing between them must be
greater than 30 mm (1.18 in.).
● E1 cables are routed straightly and bound neatly with cable ties.
● Sufficient slack is provided in E1 cables at turns.
● E1 cables cannot be pressed by the cabinet door when routed through the
cabinet. The following figure shows both correct and incorrect ways of routing
the cables.

Figure 1-223 E1 cables routed in the cabinet

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabling of optical fibers

● At least three persons are required for routing optical fibers. The cabling
activities of optical fibers are allowed only when qualified personnel and
communication facilities are available.
● The operating temperature of optical fibers ranges from -40°C to +60°C (-40°F
to +140°F). If the actual temperature is beyond this range, take protective
measures or select another route.
● Do not circle or twist cables.
● Do not bind optical fibers at the position where they bend.
● Do not stretch, step on, or place heavy objects on optical fibers. Keep the
optical fibers away from sharp objects.
● When optical fibers are routed, the excess of the optical fibers must be coiled
around special equipment, such as a fiber coiler.
● An optical jumper must be bound using binding straps. If an optical fiber
needs to be secured in a cabinet or a piece of equipment, use binding straps
to bind it and then use cable ties to secure the binding straps to the cabinet
or equipment. Ensure that the optical fibers can flexibly move in the cable
ties. Right angle bending is not allowed. The following figure shows the
correct and incorrect manners of binding optical fibers.

Figure 1-224 Binding optical fibers

● When coiling optical fibers, apply even strength. Do not bend the optical
fibers with force.
● Unused optical connectors must be covered with dustproof caps.
● The optical fibers must not be pressed by the door of the cabinet when
routed, as shown in the following figures.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-225 CPRI/Ir optical fibers routed in the cabinet (1)

Figure 1-226 CPRI/Ir optical fibers routed in the cabinet (2)

Figure 1-227 FE/GE optical fibers routed in the cabinet

● After routing an optical fiber onto the platform on a tower, route it along the
shortest path to the rails surrounding the platform, and route it along the
inside of the rails.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● After routing an optical fiber near the equipment on a tower, use clips to
secure the optical fiber onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform.
Ensure that the distance between the equipment and the position where the
optical fiber is secured is not too long.
● Coil the excess of the optical fibers near the equipment on the tower before
securing the cables onto the tower.

1.14.2 Cable Holes in a Cabinet

The cabinets used by a DBS site are maintained at the front of the cabinets. All
cables for these cabinets are routed into and out of them through the cable holes
at the bottom of them.

Cable Holes in an APM30H

The following figure shows a top view for cable holes at the bottom of an
APM30H.

Figure 1-228 Top view for cable holes in an APM30H

(1) Left cable hole (2) Right cable hole

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an
APM30H.

Table 1-33 Cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H

Item Description

Left Used for routing the following cables: APM30H input power cables,
cable equipotential cables between cabinets, heating-film power cables for
hole the IBBS200D, power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H,
CPRI optical fibers, GPS clock signal cables, GPS jumpers, and
monitoring signal cables for storage battery cabinets.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Item Description

Right Used for routing the following cables: RRU power cables, power
cable cables for storage battery cabinets, TMC11H input power cables, fan
hole power cables for the IBBS200D, TEC power cables for the IBBS200T,
E1/T1 cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE optical fibers, and
CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cables.

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the APM30H to facilitate routing all
types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an APM30H.

Figure 1-229 Cables bags in an APM30H

Cable Holes in a TMC11H

The following figure shows a top view for cable holes at the bottom of a TMC11H.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-230 Top view for cable holes in a TMC11H

(1) Left cable hole (2) Right cable hole

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in a
TMC11H.

Table 1-34 Cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H

Item Description

Left cable Used for routing the following cables: TMC11H input power cables,
hole DCDU-12B input power cables, power cables for the junction box
in the TMC11H, heating-film power cables for the IBBS200D,
equipotential cables between cabinets, monitoring signal cables
between cascaded CMUEAs (in different storage battery cabinets),
CPRI optical fibers, GPS clock signal cables, and GPS jumpers.

Right Used for routing the following cables: RRU power cables,
cable hole monitoring signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs, E1/T1 cables,
FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE optical fibers, and CMUEA-BBU
monitoring signal cables.

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the TMC11H to facilitate routing all
types of cables. The cable bags in a TMC11H are the same as those in an
APM30H.

Cable Holes in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

The following figure shows a top view for cable holes at the bottom of an
IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-231 Top view for cable holes in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

(1) Left cable hole (2) Right cable hole

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an
IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Table 1-35 Cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Item Description

Left cable Used for routing the following cables: input power cables, power
hole cables for the junction box, equipotential cables between cabinets,
monitoring signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs (in different
storage battery cabinets), CPRI optical fibers, GPS clock signal
cables, and GPS jumpers.

Right Used for routing the following cables: RRU power cables, power
cable hole cables for storage battery cabinets, input power cables, fan power
cables for the IBBS200D, TEC power cables for the IBBS200T,
monitoring signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs, E1/T1 cables,
FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE optical fibers, and CMUEA-BBU
monitoring signal cables.

NOTE

There are two cable holes on the right of the upper IBBS200D. Route cables preferentially
through the rear cable hole (the one far away from the door). If the space in the rear cable hole
is insufficient, route cables through the front cable hole (the one close to the door).

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T to facilitate
routing all types of cables. The cable bags in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T are the same
as those in an APM30H, as shown in Figure 1-229.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable Holes in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

The following figure shows a top view for cable holes at the bottom of an
IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Figure 1-232 Top view for cable holes in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

(1) Left cable hole (2) Right cable hole

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an
IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Table 1-36 Cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Item Description

Left Used for routing the following cables: power cables for the junction
cable box in the TMC11H, equipotential cables between cabinets, heater
hole power cables for the IBBS300D, monitoring signal cables for storage
battery cabinets, and monitoring signal cables between cascaded
CCU01D-03 modules (in different storage battery cabinets).

Right Used for routing the following cables: TMC11H input power cables,
cable power cables for storage batteries, power cables for cascaded storage
hole batteries, TEC power cables for the IBBS300T, and fan power cables
for the IBBS300D.

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T to facilitate
routing all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an
IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-233 Cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Cable Outlets in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

The following figure shows a top view for the cable outlets at the bottom of an
IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Figure 1-234 Top view for the cable outlets at the bottom of an IBBS700D/
IBBS700T

(1) Left cable outlet (2) Right cable outlet

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable bags are used in the cable outlets of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T. This facilitates
the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in the
IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Figure 1-235 Cable bags in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable outlets in an
IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Table 1-37 Cable routing through the cable outlets in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

Item Description

Left Cables routed through this cable outlet are as follows: PGND cable,
cable power cable for the junction box, power cable for the power distribution
outle box, CCU monitoring signal cable, and battery cabinet monitoring signal
t cable.

Right Cables routed through this cable outlet are as follows: power cable for
cable the temperature control system and power cable for the power
outle distribution box.
t

1.14.3 Installing Power Cables

The power cables need to be installed when a 19-inch rack is used include BBU
and RRU power cables.

1.14.3.1 Installing an APM30H Input Power Cable

In an APM30H (Ver.D), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to
EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU05A-03/
EPU05A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.D) from the external power equipment.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
An APM30H supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC
dual-live-wire power supplies, which require different types of input power cables
for the APM30H, as listed in the following table.

Table 1-38 Specifications of the input power cables for an APM30H

Cable Color One End The Other

End

EPU05A-03/ L1 Brown OT terminal (M6, 6 Depending

EPU05A-05 power mm2 or 0.009 in.2) on the
cable in a 220 V AC L2 Black external
three-phase scenario L3 Gray equipment

N Blue

EPU05A-03/ L Brown OT terminal (M6, 25 Depending

EPU05A-05 power mm2 or 0.039 in.2) on the
cable in a 220 V AC N Blue external
single-phase scenario equipment

EPU05A-03/ L1 Black OT terminal (M6, 25 Depending

EPU05A-05 power mm2 or 0.039 in.2) on the
cable in a 110 V AC L2 Red external
dual-live-wire scenario N White equipment

PE Green

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Determine whether to install a polyethylene (PE) wire based on local regulations.

Procedure
Step 1 Add an EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05 power cable.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add M6 OT terminals to the power cable on the EPU side by following the
instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05 power cable, as shown in Figure 1-236, Figure
1-237, and Figure 1-238.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover
for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Optional: Remove the short-circuiting bar on the L1, L2, and L3 input
terminals. If 220 V single-phase or 110 V dual-live wire power is supplied, skip
this step.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

3. Route the cable into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet,
connect each wire of the cable to the corresponding terminal, and tighten the
screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-236 Installing the EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC three-

phase)

(1) Short-circuiting bar

Figure 1-237 Installing the EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC single-

phase)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-238 Installing the EPU05A-03/EPU05A-05 power cable (110 V AC dual-

live-wire)

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.2 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H

Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the DCDU-12C power
cables and the power cable for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power
cables feed power from the APM30H into the TMC11H.

Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the TMC11H.

Table 1-39 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H

Cable Color One End The Other End

DCDU-12C RTN( Black EPC4 connector OT terminal (M6, 4

power cables +) mm2 [0.006 in.2])
NEG(- Blue
)

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable Color One End The Other End

Power cable L Brown OT terminal (M4, OT terminal (M4,

for the AC 1.5 mm2 [0.0023 1.5 mm2 [0.0023 in.
junction box N Blue
in.2]) 2])
in the
TMC11H

NOTE

Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the DCDU-12C power cables and the power cable for the AC junction box
in the TMC11H.
1. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
2. Add a connector or OT terminals to each end of the DCDU-12C power cables
and the power cable for the AC junction box in the TMC11H according to
Table 1-39. For detailed operations, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the
Power Cable and Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12C power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover
for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the DCDU-12C power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and
tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the DCDU-12C power cables
to the "LOAD7" port on the EPU in the APM30H.
4. Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

CAUTION

Ensure that the TMC11H power cable for a TMC11H added to a running base
station must be connected to the TMC11H first and then to the APM30H. The
operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal
injury.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-239 Installing DCDU-12C power cables

Step 3 Install the power cable for the AC junction box in the TMC11H, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the "L3" and "N3"
terminals in the AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on
the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the "L" and
"N" terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws
on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-240 Installing the power cable for the AC junction box in the TMC11H

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.3 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200T-L

(APM:BBC = 1:1)
Power cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200T-L include the BBC5200T-L power
cables and –48 V input power cables for the BBC5200T-L.

Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the BBC5200T-L.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-40 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to BBC5200T-L

Cable Name Color Connector Connector at
at One End the Other
End

BBC5200T-L RTN(+) Red OT terminal OT terminal

power cable (M8, 35 (M8, 35 mm2
NEG(-) Black mm2 or or 0.054 in.2)
0.054 in.2)

–48 V input RTN(+) Black EPC4 SPC1

power cable connector connector
for the NEG(-) Blue
BBC5200T-L

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Module or board configurations in APM30Hs vary depending on actual installation
scenarios.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare power cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200T-L.
1. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
2. Add connectors or OT terminals to both ends of the power cables according
to Table 1-40. For details, see Assembling an SPC1 Connector and the Power
Cable, Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable, and Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the BBC5200T-L power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover
for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Connect one end of the red and black power cables to the "RTN(+)" and
"NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR" silkscreen on the right part of the
power distribution box in the BBC5200T-L, respectively. Then, tighten the
screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the red and black power cables to the "RTN(+)" and
"NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the EPU in the
APM30H, respectively. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-241 Installing BBC5200T-L power cables

Step 3 Install –48 V input power cables for the BBC5200T-L.

1. Connect one end of the power cables to the "INPUT" port on the power
distribution box at the top of the BBC5200T-L.
2. Connect the other end of the power cables to the DC output port ("LOAD8"
port) on the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-242 Installing –48 V input power cables for the BBC5200T-L

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.4 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200T-L

Cabinets (APM:BBC = 1:2)
Power cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200T-L cabinets include the
BBC5200T-L power cables, power cable between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets, –
48 V input power cables for the BBC5200T-L, and –48 V input power cables
between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets.

Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the BBC5200T-L cabinets.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-41 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to BBC5200T-L

cabinets

Cable Name Color Connector at Connector at

One End the Other End

BBC5200T-L RTN(+) Red OT terminal OT terminal

power cable (M8, 35 mm2 (M8, 35 mm2 or
NEG(-) Black
or 0.054 in.2) 0.054 in.2)
Power cable RTN(+) Red
between
cascaded NEG(-) Black
BBC5200T-L
cabinets

–48 V input RTN(+) Black EPC4 SPC1 connector

power cable connector
for the NEG(-) Blue
BBC5200T-L

–48 V input RTN(+) Black SPC1 SPC1 connector

power cable connector
between NEG(-) Blue
cascaded
BBC5200T-L
cabinets

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Module or board configurations in APM30Hs vary depending on actual installation
scenarios.

Step 2 Install the BBC5200T-L power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover
for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Connect one end of the red and black power cables to the "RTN(+)" and
"NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR" silkscreen on the right part of the
power distribution box in the BBC5200T-L, respectively. Then, tighten the
screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

3. Connect the other end of the red and black power cables to the "RTN(+)" and
"NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the EPU in the
APM30H, respectively. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-243 Installing BBC5200T-L power cables

Step 3 Install the power cables between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover
for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Connect one end of the power cables between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets
to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR" silkscreen on
the right part of the power distribution box in the left BBC5200T-L. Then,
tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cables between cascaded BBC5200T-L
cabinets to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR"

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

silkscreen on the left part of the power distribution box in the right
BBC5200T-L. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
4. Install the cover plates of the junction boxes and use a Phillips screwdriver to
tighten the M3 screws on the cover plates to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-244 Installing power cables between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets

Step 4 Install –48 V input power cables for the BBC5200T-L.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-245 Installing –48 V input power cables for the BBC5200T-L

Step 5 Install the –48 V input power cables between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets, as
shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the SPC1 connector at one end of the –48 V input power cables
between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets to the "INPUT" port on the power
distribution box at the top of the left BBC5200T-L.
2. Connect the SPC1 connector at the other end of the –48 V input power cables
between cascaded BBC5200T-L cabinets to the "OUTPUT" port on the power
distribution box at the top of the right BBC5200T-L.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-246 Installing –48 V input power cables between cascaded BBC5200T-L
cabinets

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 8 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.5 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or

IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:1)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T include the power
cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, fan power cables for the IBBS200D, heating-
film power cables for the IBBS200D, and TEC power cables for the IBBS200T.

Context
A site can be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-42 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T

Cable Color One End The Other

End

Power cables RTN(+) Red APM30H (Ver.D): M8 OT

for the terminal (35 mm2 [0.054 in.
IBBS200D or NEG(-) Black 2], 3436)
IBBS200T
APM30H (Ver.E): M8 OT
terminal (super flexible
cable, 50 mm2 [0.078 in.2],
125)

Fan power RTN(+) Black EPC4 connector

cables for the
IBBS200D NEG(-) Blue
TEC power
cables for the
IBBS200T

(Optional) L Brown M4 OT terminal (1.5 mm2

Heating-film [0.0023 in.2])
power cable N Blue
for the
IBBS200D

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
1. Cut the power cables to suit the actual cable routes.
2. Add connectors or OT terminals to both ends of the power cables according
to Table 1-42. For details, see Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power
Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover
for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Connect one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring
terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen in the upper part of the power
distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws to 8 N·m
(70.81 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

3. Connect the other end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)"
wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the EPU in the APM30H. Then
tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
NOTE

If battery cabinets and APM30Hs are in different versions (that is, a base station is
configured with Ver.D and Ver.E cabinets), remove the OT terminals from the "BAT"
terminals on the EPU before installing a cable.
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-247 Installing power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Step 3 Install fan power cables for the IBBS200D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the power cables to the "INPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC"
silkscreen in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D.
2. Connect the other end of the power cables to the "LOAD8" port on the EPU in
the APM30H.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-248 Installing fan power cables for the IBBS200D

Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cable for the IBBS200D, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect one end of the power cable to the "L2" and "N2" terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws to
1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cable to the "L" and "N" terminals in the
heating-film junction box on the inner left wall in the IBBS200D. Then tighten
the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-249 Installing the heating-film power cable for the IBBS200D

(1) Junction box (2) Heating-film junction box

CAUTION

Do not follow the incorrect manner shown in Figure 1-250 to connect the
heating-film power cable to the heating-film junction box in the IBBS200D.
● Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cable outside the heating-
film junction box.
● Route the heating-film power cable into the heating-film junction box from top
down.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-250 Incorrect and correct manners of connecting the heating-film power
cable for the IBBS200D

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.6 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or

IBBS200Ts (APM:IBBS = 1:2)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts include the power
cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts, fan power cables for the IBBS200D, fan power cables between
cascaded IBBS200Ds, heating-film power cables for the IBBS200D, TEC power
cables for the IBBS200T, and TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts.

Context
A site can be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Table 1-43 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts

Cable Color One End The Other End

Power cables RTN(+) Red APM30H (Ver.E): M8 OT

for the terminal (super flexible cable,
IBBS200D/ NEG(-) Black 50 mm2 [0.078 in.2], 125)
IBBS200T APM30H (Ver.D): M8 OT
terminal (35 mm2 [0.054 in.2],
3436)

Power cables RTN(+) Red OT terminal (M8, 35 mm2

between [0.054 in.2], 3436)
cascaded

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable Color One End The Other End

IBBS200Ds/ NEG(-) Black

IBBS200Ts

Fan power RTN(+) Black EPC4 connector

cables for the
IBBS200D NEG(-) Blue
TEC power
cables for the
IBBS200T

Fan power RTN(+) Black EPC4 connector

cables between
cascaded NEG(-) Blue
IBBS200Ds
TEC power
cables between
cascaded
IBBS200Ts

(Optional) L Brown OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2

Heating-film [0.0023 in.2])
power cables N Blue
for the
IBBS200D

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● The method of installing the TEC power cables for the IBBS200T is the same as the
method of installing the fan power cables for the IBBS200D. This section uses the
method of installing the fan power cables for the IBBS200D as an example.
● The method of installing the TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts is the same
as the method of installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds. This
section uses the method of installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds
as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
1. Cut the power cables to suit the actual cable routes.
2. Add connectors or OT terminals to both ends of the power cables according
to Table 1-43. For details, see Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power
Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M3 screw on the cover plate of the
junction box, and open the cover plate.
2. Connect one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring
terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen in the upper part of the power

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws to 8 N·m

(70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)"
wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the EPU in the APM30H.
NOTE

Figure 1-251 Installing power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Step 3 Install power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in the

following figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring
terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

box in one IBBS200D/IBBS200T and the other end of the power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen in the
lower part of the power distribution box in the other IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Then tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-252 Installing power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Step 4 Install fan power cables for the IBBS200D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the power cables to the "INPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC"
silkscreen in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D.
2. Connect the other end of the power cables to the "LOAD8" port on the EPU in
the APM30H.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-253 Installing fan power cables for the IBBS200D

Step 5 Install fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Connect one end of the power cables to the "OUTPUT" port near the "FAN/
TEC" silkscreen on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the
APM30H.
2. Connect the other end of the power cables to the "INPUT" port near the
"FAN/TEC" silkscreen on the power distribution box in the other IBBS200D.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-254 Installing fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds

Step 6 Install heating-film power cables for the IBBS200Ds, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M3 screw on the cover plate of the
junction box, and open the cover plate.
2. Connect one end of one heating-film power cable to the "L2" and "N2"
terminals in the junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H, and
connect one end of the other heating-film power cable to the "L1" and "N1"
terminals in the same junction box. Then tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16
lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of each heating-film power cable to the "L" and "N"
terminals in the heating-film junction box on the inner left wall in the
corresponding IBBS200D. Then tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-255 Installing heating-film power cables for the IBBS200Ds

(1) Junction box (2) Heating-film junction box

CAUTION

Do not follow the incorrect manner shown in Figure 1-256 to connect the
heating-film power cables to the heating-film junction boxes in the IBBS200Ds.
● Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cables outside the heating-
film junction boxes.
● Route the heating-film power cables into the heating-film junction boxes from
top down.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-256 Incorrect and correct manners of connecting the heating-film power
cables for the IBBS200Ds

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.7 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300Ds/

IBBS300Ts (APM:IBBS = 1:2)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts include power cables
for the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts, fan power cables for the IBBS300Ds, fan power cables between
cascaded IBBS300Ds, power cables for the junction boxes, TEC power cables for
the IBBS300T, and TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts.

Context
A site can be configured with either an IBBS300D or an IBBS300T.

The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts.

Table 1-44 Specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Cable Color Connector

Power cable RTN(+) Red ● APM30H (Ver.D): OT

for the terminal (M8, 35 mm2 or
IBBS300D/ NEG(-) Black
0.054 in.2)
IBBS300T
● APM30H (Ver.E): OT terminal
Power cable (M8, 50 mm2 or 0.078 in.2)
between
cascaded
IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable Color Connector

Fan power RTN(+) Black OT terminal (M4, 2.5 mm2 or

cable for the 0.0039 in.2)
IBBS300D
NEG(-) Blue EPC4 connector
Fan power
cable between
cascaded
IBBS300Ds
TEC power
cable for the
IBBS300T
TEC power
cable between
cascaded
IBBS300Ts

(Optional) L Brown OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2 or

Power cable 0.0023 in.2)
for the N Blue
junction box
(Optional)
Power cable
between
cascaded
junction boxes

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS300T is the same as the
method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D. This section describes
the method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D as an example.
● The method of installing the TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ts is the same
as the method of installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds. This
section uses the method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds
as an example.
● Module or board configurations in APM30Hs vary depending on actual installation
scenarios.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts.
1. Cut cables to suit the actual cable routes.
2. Add connectors or OT terminals to both ends of the power cable according to
Table 1-44. For details, see Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power
Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the negative cable (black) to the
"NEG(-)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
left IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the negative cable (black) to the
"NEG(-)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
right IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the positive cable (red) to the
"RTN(+)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of the
left IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
4. Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the positive cable (red) to the
"RTN(+)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of the
right IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-257 Installing power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Step 3 Install power cables for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the negative cable (black) to the
"NEG(-)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
right IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminal at the other end to the "NEG(-)" wiring terminal
near the "BAT" silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H and
tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the positive cable (red) to the
"RTN(+)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of the
right IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
4. Connect the OT terminal at the other end to the "RTN(+)" wiring terminal
near the "BAT" silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H and
tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-258 Installing power cables for the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Step 4 Install the fan power cables for the IBBS300D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner
right wall of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m
(14.16 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the DC
output port ("LOAD8") on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-259 Installing fan power cables for an IBBS300D

Step 5 Install fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the two power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the right IBBS300D
and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of
the same IBBS300D. Then, tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the two power cables to the
"NEG(-)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the left
IBBS300D and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner
right wall of the same IBBS300D. Then, tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16
lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-260 Installing fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds

Step 6 Optional: Install the power cable for the junction box, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates of the
junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown and blue wires to the "L"
and "N" terminals in the junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to
tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the "L2"
and "N2" terminals in the junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-261 Installing the power cable for a junction box

Step 7 Optional: Install the power cable between cascaded junction boxes, as shown in
the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M3 screw on the cover plate of the
junction box, and open the cover plate.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown and blue wires of the
power cable to the "L1" and "N1" terminals in the junction box of the right
IBBS300D and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M4 screws to 1.6 N·m
(14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown and blue wires of the
power cable to the "L" and "N" terminals in the junction box of the left
IBBS300D and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M4 screws to 1.6 N·m
(14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Install the cover plate of the junction box and use a Phillips screwdriver to
tighten the M3 screws on the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-262 Installing the power cable between cascaded junction boxes

Step 8 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 10 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.8 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D or

IBBS700T (APM:IBBS = 1:1)
Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D or IBBS700T include the power
cables for the IBBS700D/IBBS700T, the power cable for the junction box in the
IBBS700D/IBBS700T, and the power cables for the temperature control system in
the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Context
A site can only be configured with either the IBBS700D or IBBS700T.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Table 1-45 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
Cable Color One End The Other
End

Power cables RTN(+) Red OT terminal (M8, 35 mm2

for the [0.054 in.2], 3436)
IBBS700D/ NEG(-) Black
IBBS700T

Power cables RTN(+) Black EPC4 connector

for the
temperature NEG(-) Blue
control system
in the
IBBS700D/
IBBS700T

Power cable L Brown OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2

for the [0.0023 in.2])
junction box in N Blue
the IBBS700D/
IBBS700T

NOTE

Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
1. Cut the power cables to suit the actual cable routes.
2. Add connectors or OT terminals to both ends of the power cables according
to Table 1-45. For details, see Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power
Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS700D/IBBS700T, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)_1" and "NEG(-)_1"
wiring terminals in the upper part of the power distribution box in the
IBBS700D/IBBS700T. Then tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)"
wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the EPU in the APM30H. Then
tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-263 Installing the power cables for the IBBS700D/IBBS700T

Step 3 Install the power cables for the temperature control system in the IBBS700D/
IBBS700T, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the power cables to the "DC INPUT" port in the power
distribution box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
2. Connect the other end of the power cables to the "LOAD8" port on the EPU in
the APM30H.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-264 Installing the power cables for the temperature control system in the
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

Step 4 Optional: Install the power cable for the junction box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T,
as shown in the following figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect one end of the power cable to the "L2" and "N2" terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws to
1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cable to the "L" and "N" terminals in the
heating-film power box on the inner left wall of the IBBS700D/IBBS700T. Then
tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-265 Installing the power cable for the junction box in the IBBS700D/
IBBS700T

(1) Junction box

----End

1.14.3.9 Installing BBU Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing BBU power
cables.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
The following table lists the specifications of BBU power cables.

Table 1-46 Specifications of BBU power cables

Cable One End The Other End

BBU3900/BBU3910 EPC4 connector 3V3 connector

power cable

BBU5900 EPC4 connector HDEPC connector

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● The cables are black and blue in most regions, whereas red and blue in China.

Procedure
Step 1 Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU3900/BBU3910 power cables by
following the instructions in Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Add EPC4 connectors to BBU5900 power cables on the power equipment side by
following the instructions in Assembling an EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE

● A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU3900/BBU3910 power cable
before delivery. An EPC4 connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

Step 2 Install BBU3900/BBU3910 power cables.

1. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cables to the "-48V"
port on the UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25
N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the BBU
power cables to the "LOAD0" port on the EPU, as shown in the following
figure.
2. When installing the second BBU3900/BBU3910, connect the 3V3 connector at
one end of the BBU power cables to the "-48V" port on the UPEU in the BBU.
Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end to the "LOAD6" port on the
EPU, as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-266 Installing BBU3900/BBU3910 power cables

Step 3 Install BBU5900 power cables.

NOTE

● When only one BBU5900 is installed in the AC scenario, the BBU5900 supports a maximum
of two power boards. Connect one end of power cables to "LOAD0", "LOAD1", "LOAD5", and
"LOAD6" ports on the EPU05A.
● When installing a BBU3900/BBU3910 as the first BBU in the AC scenario, connect one end of
power cables to the "LOAD0" or "LOAD1" port on the EPU05A. When installing a BBU5900
as the second BBU, connect one end of BBU power cables to the "LOAD5" and "LOAD6"
ports on the EPU05A.
● When installing the first BBU5900 in the DC scenario, connect one end of power cables to
the "LOAD4" and "LOAD5" ports on the DCDU-12C. When installing the second BBU5900,
connect one end of power cables to the "LOAD6" and "LOAD7" ports on the DCDU-12C.
● One UPEU is mandatory. The second UPEU is optional based on actual requirements. For
details about how to install the second UPEU, see Installing Boards in a BBU5900.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
1. Connect the HDEPC connector at one end of the BBU power cables to the
UPEU in the BBU5900.
2. In an APM30H (Ver.D), connect the other end of BBU power cables to the
"LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the EPU05A. In a TMC11H (Ver.D), connect
the other end of BBU power cables to the "LOAD4" and "LOAD5" ports on the
DCDU-12C.
3. When there is a second UPEU in the BBU5900, connect one end of the BBU
power cables to this UPEU in the BBU5900 and connect the other end to the
power equipment.
– In an APM30H (Ver.D), connect SPC1 connectors at the other end of BBU
power cables to the "LOAD5" and "LOAD6" ports on the EPU05A.
– In a TMC11H (Ver.D), connect the EPC4 connectors at the other end of
BBU power cables to the "LOAD6" and "LOAD7" ports on the DCDU-12C.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-267 Installing BBU5900 power cables

CAUTION

When installing a BBU power cable for a running base station, connect the
cable to the BBU before connecting it to the power equipment. The
operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or
personal injury.

NOTE

Two groups of wires for a power board must be of the same length and connected to
the same power supply module.

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Attach labels to the installed BBU3900/BBU3910 cables according to the

instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label.

Step 6 Attach labels to the installed BBU5900 cables according to the instructions in
Attaching an L-Shaped Label.

Issue 02 (2021-08-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

Figure 1-268 Attaching labels

----End

1.14.3.10 Installing RRU Power Cables

RRU power cables need to be installed for RRUs after the installation.

1.14.3.10.1 Installing RRU Power Cables in a -48 V Scenario

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables.

Context
RRU power cables feed DC power into RRUs.

NOTE

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-47 RRU configuration scenarios

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional
Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● APM30H 21 RRUs EPU05A-07/09+O A single APM30H

(Ver.E) DM06D: (Ver.E) supports a
● APM30H ● The first to maximum of
(Ver.E_B~D) sixth low- fifteen 3.3 mm2 to
power RRUs 8.2 mm2 (0.005
are powered by in.2 to 0.013 in.2)
the EPU RRU power cables
subrack. and one ODM
● The seventh to power cable
fifteenth low- (supporting six
power RRUs RRU power
are powered by outputs).
the
PDU03D-02 in
the EPU
subrack.
● The sixteenth
to twenty-first
low-power
RRUs are
powered by
the ODM06D,
which obtains
power from
the
PDU01D-01 in
the EPU
subrack.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional

Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● APM30H 18 RRUs EPU05A-07/09+O A single APM30H

(Ver.E) DM06D (Ver.E) supports a
● APM30H +DCDU16D: maximum of nine
(Ver.E_B~D) ● The first to 3.3 mm2 to 8.2
sixth low- mm2 (0.005 in.2
power RRUs to 0.013 in.2) RRU
are powered by power cables, one
the EPU ODM power cable
subrack. (supporting six
● The seventh to RRU power
ninth low- outputs), and
power RRUs three 6 mm2 to
are powered by 16 mm2 (0.009 in.
2 to 0.025 in.2)
the
PDU03D-02 in RRU power
the EPU cables.
subrack.
● The tenth to
fifteenth low-
power RRUs
are powered by
the ODM06D,
which obtains
power from
the
PDU01D-01 in
the EPU
subrack.
● The sixteenth
to eighteenth
high-power
RRUs are
powered by
the DCDU16D,
which obtains
power from
the two
PDU01D-01
modules in the
EPU subrack.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional

Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● TMC11H 21 RRUs DCDU-12B A single TMC11H

(Ver.E) +ODM06D: (Ver.E) supports a
● TMC11H ● The first to maximum of
(Ver.E_B~D) sixth low- fifteen 6 mm2
power RRUs (0.009 in.2) RRU
are powered by power cables and
the DCDU-12B one ODM power
that is cable (supporting
configured in six RRU power
the TMC11H outputs).
cabinet before
delivery.
● The seventh to
fifteenth low-
power RRUs
are powered by
the second
DCDU-12B,
which is
installed
onsite.
● The sixteenth
to twenty-first
low-power
RRUs are
powered by
the ODM06D
installed
onsite. The
ODM06D
obtains power
from external
power
equipment.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional

Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● TMC11H 21 RRUs DCDU-12B A single TMC11H

(Ver.E) +ODM06D (Ver.E) supports a
● TMC11H +DCDU16D: maximum of
(Ver.E_B~D) ● The first to fifteen 6 mm2
sixth low- (0.009 in.2) RRU
power RRUs power cables, one
are powered by ODM power cable
the DCDU-12B (supporting three
that is RRU power
configured in outputs), and
the TMC11H three 6 mm2 to
cabinet before 16 mm2 (0.009 in.
delivery. 2 to 0.025 in.2)

● The seventh to RRU power

fifteenth low- cables.
power RRUs
are powered by
the second
DCDU-12B,
which is
installed
onsite.
● For the
sixteenth to
twenty-first
RRUs, three
low-power
RRUs are
powered by
the ODM06D
installed
onsite, and
three high-
power RRUs
are powered by
the DCDU16D
installed
onsite. Both
the ODM06D
and DCDU16D
obtain power
from the
external power
equipment.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional

Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● APM30H 15 RRUs EPU05A-03/05+D A single APM30H

(Ver.D) CDU-12B (Ver.D) supports a
● APM30H +ODM06D: maximum of nine
(Ver.D_B) ● The first to 8.2 mm2 (0.013
sixth low- in.2) RRU power
● APM30H
power RRUs cables, three 4
(Ver.D_C)
are powered by mm2 (0.006 in.2)
the EPU RRU power
subrack. cables, and one
● The seventh to ODM power cable
twelfth low- (supporting three
power RRUs RRU power
are powered by outputs).
the DCDU-12B.
● The thirteenth
to fifteenth
low-power
RRUs are
powered by
the ODM06D
installed
onsite. The
ODM06D
obtains power
from external
power
equipment.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional

Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● APM30H 15 RRUs EPU05A-03/05+D A single APM30H

(Ver.D) CDU-12B (Ver.D) supports a
● APM30H +DCDU16D: maximum of nine
(Ver.D_B) ● The first to 8.2 mm2 (0.013
sixth low- in.2) RRU power
● APM30H
power RRUs cables, three 4
(Ver.D_C)
are powered by mm2 (0.006 in.2)
the EPU RRU power
subrack. cables, and three
● The seventh to 6 mm2 to 16 mm2
twelfth low- (0.009 in.2 to
power RRUs 0.025 in.2) RRU
are powered by power cables.
the DCDU-12B.
● The thirteenth
to fifteenth
high-power
RRUs are
powered by
the DCDU16D
installed
onsite. The
DCDU16D
obtains power
from the
external power
equipment.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional

Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● TMC11H 12 RRUs DCDU-12B: A single TMC11H

(Ver.D) ● The first to (Ver.D) supports a
● TMC11H sixth low- maximum of
(Ver.D_B) power RRUs twelve 6 mm2
are powered by (0.009 in.2) RRU
● TMC11H
the DCDU-12B power cables.
(Ver.D_C)
that is
configured in
the TMC11H
cabinet before
delivery.
● The seventh to
twelfth low-
power RRUs
are powered by
the second
DCDU-12B,
which is
installed
onsite.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Maximum Power Supply Cross-Sectional

Quantity in One Mode Area
Cabinet

● TMC11H 12 RRUs DCDU-12B A single TMC11H

(Ver.D) +DCDU16D: (Ver.D) supports a
● TMC11H ● The first to maximum of nine
(Ver.D_B) sixth low- 6 mm2 (0.009 in.
2) RRU power
● TMC11H power RRUs
are powered by cables and three 6
(Ver.D_C)
the DCDU-12B mm2 to 16 mm2
that is (0.009 in.2 to
configured in 0.025 in.2) RRU
the TMC11H power cables.
cabinet before
delivery.
● For the seventh
to twelfth
RRUs, three
high-power
RRUs are
powered by
the second
DCDU-12B
installed
onsite, and the
other three
high-power
RRUs are
powered by
the DCDU16D
installed
onsite. The
DCDU16D
obtains power
from the
external power
equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: When the APM30H is stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L,
relocate the ground clips in the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L,
as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the three nuts that are used to secure the three ground clips onto the
three PGND cables from the inner right wall of the APM30H. Then remove
the three ground clips.
2. Secure the PGND cables with the ground clips to the two pivot screws on the
inner right wall of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L. Then tighten the
screws on the ground clips to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-269 Relocating the ground clips

Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.

1. Route the RRU power cables into the cabinet through the right cable bag. If
there are two cable bags on the inner right side of the cabinet, route the
cables preferentially through the rear one.
2. Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm
(11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in the cabinet to expose the shield layer.
3. Strip the shield layer while reserving a 70 mm (2.76 in.) length of it and
expose two core wires.
4. Reserve the shield layer of 50 mm (1.97 in.) and wrap two layers of insulation
tape around the upper part of the shield layer to ensure secure attachment of
the shield layer.

NOTICE

The reserved shield layer must be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or longer. If it is shorter

than 50 mm (1.97 in.), the ground clip may not be tightened securely.

5. Route the RRU power cables through the ground clip and ensure that the
shield layers securely contact the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on
the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.

Figure 1-270 Installing the ground clip

NOTE

When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
● When installing one to three RRU power cables, place all the power cables at one side of
the ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in the following figure.
● When installing four or six RRU power cables, place the power cables evenly on two sides
of the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
● When installing five RRU power cables, use two ground clips, with three or four power
cables in one ground clip and the remaining power cables in the other ground clip, as
shown by illustration 3 in the following figure.
● When installing seven/eight/nine/ten/twelve RRU power cables, use two ground clips and
distribute the power cables by complying with the preceding rules.
● When installing eleven RRU power cables, use two ground clips, with five power cables in
one ground clip and six power cables in the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 4 in
the following figure.
● When installing thirteen or more RRU power cables, use three ground clips and distribute
the power cables by complying with the preceding rules.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-271 Installing ground clips (side view)

Step 3 Connect one end of the RRU power cables to the RRUs. For the method of adding
connectors to the power cables on the RRU side, see the corresponding RRU
installation guide.

CAUTION

When installing an RRU power cable for a running base station, connect the cable
to the RRU before connecting it to the power system. An incorrect sequence or
reverse connection of the power cable will cause damage to the RRU or injuries to
the human body.

Step 4 Add EPC5 connectors or EPC11 connectors to the RRU power cables on the cabinet
side according to the instructions in Assembling an EPC5 Connector and the Power
Cable and Assembling an EPC11 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Install RRU power cables in the cabinet, as shown in the following figures.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-272 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.E)

(EPU05A-07/09+ODM06D for power supply and EPC5 connectors used on the
cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-273 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.E) (EPU05A-07/

EPU05A-09+ODM06 for power supply and EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet
side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-274 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.E)

(EPU05A-07/09+ODM06D+DCDU16D for power supply and EPC5 connectors used
on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-275 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.E)

(EPU05A-07/09+ODM06D+DCDU16D for power supply and EPC11 connectors
used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-276 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.D) (EPC5 connectors
used on the cabinet side)
NOTE

The RRU obtains power from the DCDU16D in the same way as obtaining power from the
DCDU-12B. The following figure uses the DCDU-12B as an example.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-277 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.D) (EPC11

connectors used on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-278 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.E) (EPC5 connectors
used on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-279 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.E) (EPC11 connectors
used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-280 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.D) (EPC5 connectors
used on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-281 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.D) (EPC11 connectors
used on the cabinet side)

Step 6 Install RRU power cables on the DCDU16D side.

1. Before connecting cables, ensure that the circuit breaker is turned off. When
the circuit breaker is turned off, the handle is pulled out and the indicator is
green, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-282 Circuit breaker status before cable connection

2. Strip the sheaths off cables based on the cable stripping ruler for the circuit
breaker. Figure 1-283 shows the inapplicable cable specifications. Figure
1-284 shows the cable stripping ruler.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-283 Inapplicable cable specifications

Figure 1-284 Cable stripping ruler

3. Connect the connectors on the RRU power cables on the RRU side to the
power ports on the RRUs.

CAUTION

– Only 6 mm2 to 16 mm2 (0.009 in.2 to 0.025 in.2) power cables can be
connected to the LOAD0 to LOAD2 circuit breakers. 12 AWG (3.3 mm2 or
0.005 in.2), 10 AWG (5.3 mm2 or 0.008 in.2), 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2), or 2.5
mm2 (0.0039 in.2) power cables cannot be connected to the LOAD0 to
LOAD2 circuit breakers. The length of the stripped sheath must be between
17 mm (0.67 in.) and 19 mm (0.75 in.).
– When installing an RRU power cable in a base station that has been
deployed, first connect the connector on the RRU side, and then connect
the connector on the power equipment side. An incorrect sequence or
reverse connection of the power cable will cause damage to the RRU or
injuries to the human body.

4. Connect the RTN and NEG power cables to the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the
DCDU16D.
a. Insert the Φ3 flat-head screwdriver into the "+" and "-" tool holes of the
circuit breaker obliquely in sequence, and insert the prepared power
cables into the "+" and "-" connection holes. Ensure that the core wires
contact the bottom of the connection hole and do not split. The following

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

figure shows the positions of the "+" and "-" tool holes and connection
holes.

Figure 1-285 Installing the RTN and NEG power cables

b. Remove the flat-head screwdriver from the tool hole of the circuit
breaker.
c. Pull each power cable slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If
the power cable is pulled out a bit or the wires are exposed outside the
hole, remove the power cable, cut the split wires, and then strip the
sheath and install the power cable again.
5. After the cable connection, route the power cables through the cable claw
and secure the cables, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-286 Securing power cables

6. Press the handle of the circuit breaker and turn on the circuit breaker to
supply power to loads. When the circuit breaker is turned on, the handle is
pressed and the indicator is red, as shown in the following figure.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-287 Circuit breaker status after cable connection

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.10.2 Installing RRU Power Cables and ODM06D Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables and ODM06D power cables when an ODM06D is configured.

Context
● Each ODM06D supplies power for six RRUs.
● For the ODM06D configuration principles, see Table 1-47.
● An ODM06D transfers power from the power equipment to RRUs.

Table 1-48 Power cable specifications

Cable Installa One End The Other End
tion
Scenari Connecto Installati Connector Installation
o r on Position
Position

ODM06 APM30 OT PDU01D Cord end ODM06D

D power H terminal in the terminal
cable (Ver.E) (M6) EPU
subrack

APM30 OT DCDU-12 Cord end

H terminal B terminal
(Ver.D) (M6)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cable Installa One End The Other End

tion
Scenari Connecto Installati Connector Installation
o r on Position
Position

TMC11 Dependin External Cord end

H g on power terminal
(Ver.E) actual equipmen
conditions t

TMC11 Dependin External Cord end

H g on power terminal
(Ver.E) actual equipmen
conditions t

RRU APM30 Cord end ODM06D Depending on RRU

power H terminal the port on the
cable (Ver.E) RRU

APM30 Cord end ODM06D Depending on

H terminal the port on the
(Ver.D) RRU

TMC11 Cord end ODM06D Depending on

H terminal the port on the
(Ver.E) RRU

TMC11 Cord end ODM06D Depending on

H terminal the port on the
(Ver.D) RRU

Procedure
Step 1 Route the ODM06D power cables out of the cabinet from top down through the
cable bag on the inner right side of the cabinet.

NOTICE

● When the cable bag is already full of cables, do not route cables through the
cable bag from bottom up. Otherwise, the bottom of the cable bag may be
dragged and broken.
● Before routing the ODM06D power cables from top down, bind all other cables
so that they are not affected by the ODM06D power cables.

Step 2 Install the ground clip for the ODM06D power cable.
1. Strip a length of jacket off the ODM06D power cables at the position 300 mm
(11.81 in.) away from the cable bag to expose the shield layer.
2. Strip the shield layer while reserving a 70 mm (2.76 in.) length of it and
expose two core wires.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

3. Reserve the shield layer of 50 mm (1.97 in.) and wrap two layers of insulation
tape around the upper part of the shield layer to ensure secure attachment of
the shield layer.

NOTICE

The reserved shield layer must be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or longer. If it is shorter

than 50 mm (1.97 in.), the ground clip may not be tightened securely.

4. Open the ground clip that secures three RRU power cables on the right side of
the cabinet.
NOTE

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six power cables.

5. Route the ODM06D power cables through the ground clip and ensure that
the shield layers securely contact the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw
on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-288 Installing the ground clip

Step 3 Add the cord end terminal to the ODM06D power cable on the ODM side
according to the instructions in Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power
Cable.

Step 4 Open the cover for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the cover for the
ODM06D, and then open the cover.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

2. Use an M4 flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screw on the protective cover,

and then open the protective cover.

Figure 1-289 Opening the cover for the ODM06D

Step 5 Prepare the cable according to the cabling label on the protective cover.
Step 6 Install the RRU power cables and ODM06D power cable, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the cable clip.
NOTE

The screw on the cable clip can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-
sectional areas.
2. Partially loosen the PG connector to route the cable through the PG
connector.
3. Route the RRU power cables and ODM06D power cable through the PG
connector.
4. Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminal onto the
terminal block to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.), which is a recommended torque.
5. Use the cable clip to secure the cable and tighten the M4 screw on the cable
clip to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.) to ensure that the cable clip closely contacts
with the shield layer of the cable. The 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.) value is a
recommended torque.
6. Secure the PG connector of the cable.

NOTICE

Tighten the PG connector to protect the device from water damage.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-290 Installing the RRU power cables and ODM06D power cable

(1) RRU power cables (2) ODM06D power cable

Step 7 Close the cover for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Close the protective cover and use an M4 flat-head screwdriver to secure the
screw on the protective cover.
2. Close the cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws on the
cover.

Figure 1-291 Closing the cover for the ODM06D

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 8 Install RRU power cables according to instructions in the corresponding RRU
installation guide.
Step 9 Install the ODM06D power cable.
● Optional: When the ODM06D is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E), connect the
ODM06D power cable to the PDU01D-01.
– Add the OT terminal to the ODM06D power cable on the cabinet side by
following the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
– Ensure that the circuit breakers on the RRUs connecting to the ODM06D
are turned off.
– Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" terminals on the PDU01D-01 in the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-292 Installing the ODM06D power cable

● Optional: When the ODM06D is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D), connect the

ODM06D power cable to the DCDU-12B.
– Add the OT terminal to the ODM06D power cable on the cabinet side by
following the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
– Ensure that the circuit breakers on the RRUs connecting to the ODM06D
are turned off.
– Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU-12B in the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-293 Installing the ODM06D power cable

● Optional: When the ODM06D is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E) or TMC11H

(Ver.D), connect the ODM06D power cable to external power equipment.

Step 10 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 11 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 12 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.10.3 Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 V Scenario

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables in a -57 V scenario.

Context
When an RRU requires voltage boosting power distribution in a -57 V scenario, an
EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S/BDU70-03/SDU60-02/EPU02S-02 needs to
be configured. The following figures show installation positions.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

● The EPU02D/EPU02D-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/APM30H

(Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E) series cabinets.
● The EPU02B/EPU02S can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E)
series cabinets.
● The EPU02S-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E) series
cabinets.
● The BDU70-03/SDU60-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinets.
● The installation positions and installation methods of the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/
EPU02S/EPU02S-02 are the same. The installation positions and installation methods of the
BDU70-03/SDU60-02 are the same.

Figure 1-294 Installation positions

(1) Installation position of an EPU02D/ (2) Installation position of an EPU02D/

EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S/ EPU02D-02
EPU02S-02

Figure 1-295 Installation positions

(1) Installation position of an SDU60-02/BDU70-03

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-49 RRU power cables

Cable One End The Other End

Connecto Installation Connector Installation

r Position Position

RRU power EPC5/ ● LOAD0, Depending RRU

cable EPC11 LOAD1, or on the
connector LOAD2 port on port on
the BDU65-03 the RRU
in the EPU02D
● LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port on
the BDU65-03
in the
EPU02D-02

RRU power Bare wire ● LOAD0, Depending RRU

cable LOAD1, or on the
LOAD2 port on port on
the DCDU16D the RRU

RRU power EPC5/ LOAD0, LOAD1, Depending RRU

cable EPC11 or LOAD2 port on on the
connector the BDU70-03 in port on
the EPU02B the RRU

RRU power SPC1 LOAD0 or LOAD1 Depending RRU

cable connector port on the on the
SDU60-02 in the port on
EPU02S the RRU

RRU power SPC1 LOAD0 or LOAD1 Depending RRU

cable connector port on the on the
SDU60-02 in the port on
EPU02S-02 or the RRU
LOAD0 port on
the SDU30-01 in
the EPU02S-02

NOTE

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1. Remove the three nuts that are used to secure the three ground clips onto the
three PGND cables from the inner right wall of the APM30H. Then remove
the three ground clips.
2. Secure the PGND cables with the ground clips to the two pivot screws on the
inner right wall of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L. Then tighten the
screws on the ground clips to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-296 Relocating the ground clips

Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTICE

The reserved shield layer must be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or longer. If it is shorter

than 50 mm (1.97 in.), the ground clip may not be tightened securely.

5. Route the RRU power cables through the ground clip and ensure that the
shield layers securely contact the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on
the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
NOTE

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.

Figure 1-297 Installing the ground clip

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

Figure 1-298 Installing ground clips (side view)

Step 3 Connect one end of the RRU power cables to the RRUs. For the method of adding
connectors to the power cables on the RRU side, see the corresponding RRU
installation guide.

CAUTION

Step 4 Add EPC5/EPC11 connectors to be inserted into the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B

onto the RRU power cables by following the instructions in Assembling an EPC5
Connector and the Power Cable and Assembling an EPC11 Connector and the
Power Cable. Add SPC1 connectors to be inserted into the EPU02S onto the RRU

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

power cables by following the instructions in Assembling an SPC1 Connector and

the Power Cable. Add SPC1 connectors to be inserted into the EPU02S-02 onto the
RRU power cables by following the instructions in Assembling an SPC1 Connector
and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Connect the RRU power cables to the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S/
EPU02S-02.
● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0", "LOAD1", and "LOAD2" ports on the EPU02D, as
shown in Figure 1-299 and Figure 1-300.
● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the EPU02D-02, as shown in
Figure 1-301 and Figure 1-302.
● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0", "LOAD1", and "LOAD2" ports on the EPU02B, as
shown in Figure 1-303 and Figure 1-304.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors at the other end of the RRU power cables to the
"LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the EPU02S, as shown in Figure 1-305.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors at the other end of the RRU power cables to the
"LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the first SDU (SDU60-02) and the "LOAD0"
port on the second SDU (SDU30-01) on the EPU02S-02, as shown in Figure
1-306.

Figure 1-299 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-300 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D for power supply and EPC11
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-301 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D-02 for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-302 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D-02 for power supply and
EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-303 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02B for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-304 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02B for power supply and EPC11
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-305 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02S for power supply and SPC1
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-306 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02S-02 for power supply and SPC1
connectors used on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 6 Connect the RRU power cables to the BDU70-03/SDU60-02.

● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors on the power cables of the first to
third RRUs to LOAD0, LOAD1, and LOAD2 ports on the BDU70-03 in the
EPU05A, as shown in Figure 1-307 and Figure 1-308.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors on the power cables of the first and second
RRUs to LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports on the first SDU60-02 in the EPU05A, and
connect the SPC1 connector on the power cables of the third RRU to the
LOAD0 port on the second SDU60-02 in the EPU05A, as shown in Figure
1-309.

Figure 1-307 Installing RRU power cables (BDU70-03 for power supply and
EPC5 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-308 Installing RRU power cables (BDU70-03 for power supply and
EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-309 Installing RRU power cables (SDU60-02 for power supply and
SPC1 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.3.10.4 Installing RRU Power Cables (RRU Power Consumption > 800 W, with
an ODM03D)
When the power consumption per RRU is greater than 800 W, an ODM03D needs
to be configured.

Context
To supply power for high-power RRUs (power consumption per RRU > 800 W), an
ODM03D needs to be configured.

Table 1-50 Configuration scenario

Cabinet Number of Power Supply Mode

High-Power
RRUs

APM30H 6 RRUs ● The first to third RRUs are powered by

(Ver.E) the EPU.
● The fourth to sixth RRUs are powered by
two PDU03D modules in the EPU
subrack.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Number of Power Supply Mode

High-Power
RRUs

TMC11H 3 RRUs The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs.

(Ver.E)

APM30H 3 RRUs The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs.

(Ver.D)

TMC11H 3 RRUs The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs.

(Ver.D)

OMB (Ver.C) 3 RRUs The PDU10D-01 provides power for RRUs.

19-inch rack - Each DCDU-12B supplies power for three

RRUs.

An ODM03D transfers power from the power equipment to RRUs.

Table 1-51 Power cable specifications

Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connector Installation

Position Position

ODM03D EPC5/EPC11 EPU subrack, OT terminal ODM03D

input power connector PDU03D,
cable DCDU-12B, or
PDU10D-01

ODM03D- OT terminal ODM03D Depending on RRU

RRU power the port on
cable the RRU

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 Install ODM03D-RRU power cables according to the instructions in ODM03D User
Guide.

Step 2 Route the ODM03D input power cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.

Step 3 Install the ground clip according to the sections "Installing RRU Power Cables."

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 4 Connect the ODM03D input power cables to the ODM03D.

Step 5 Add an EPC5/EPC11 connector to the end of each power cable on the power
equipment side according to the instructions in Assembling an EPC5 Connector
and the Power Cable or Assembling an EPC11 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 6 Connect the ODM03D input power cables to the power equipment according to
the following table and figure.

Table 1-52 Cable connections

Power Equipment Installation Position at Installation Position at
One End the Other End

EPU05A-07/EPU05A-09 Any of the LOAD9 to ODM03D

subrack LOAD14 ports

PDU03D-02 LOAD0, LOAD1, or

LOAD2 port

DCDU-12B Any of the LOAD0 to

LOAD5 ports

PDU10D-01 Any of the LOAD0 to

LOAD5 ports

NOTE

Two adjacent power output ports on the power equipment are used to supply power for an
ODM03D.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-310 Installing ODM03D input power cables

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.14.4 Installing Transmission Cables

The transmission cables need to be installed when a 19-inch rack is used include
E1/T1 cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, and FE/GE optical fibers.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1.14.4.1 Installing an E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an E1/T1 surge
protection transfer cable.

Context
The following shows how to install an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable in a
GU base station using the independent transmission mode. For the E1/T1 surge
protection transfer cable connections in other configuration scenarios, see section
Transmission Cable Connections in 3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Cables.

The installation positions and routing of E1/T1 surge protection transfer cables are
the same in the APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H
(Ver.E). This section uses an APM30H (Ver.E) as an example.

The installation positions and routing of E1/T1 surge protection transfer cables are
the same in the APM5930(AC) and APM5930(DC). This section uses an
APM5930(AC) as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DB26 connector at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer
cable to the "E1/T1" port on the main control board (such as UMPT) in the BBU,
and then tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-311 Installing an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable in an APM30H

(Ver.E)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-312 Installing an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable in an

APM5930(AC)

Step 2 Connect the DB25 connector at the other end of the E1/T1 surge protection
transfer cable to the "INSIDE" port on the UELP in the SLPU of the APM30H or the
"INSIDE" port on the UELP in the FAN02G of the APM5930, and then tighten the
plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the
preceding figures.
Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.4.2 Installing an E1/T1 Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an E1/T1 cable.

Prerequisites

NOTICE

Ensure that connectors are added to both ends of an E1/T1 cable before cable
connections. Ensure that both ends of the E1/T1 cable are disconnected from any
equipment when the connectors are added.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
● The following shows how to install an E1/T1 cable in a GU base station using
the independent transmission mode. For the E1/T1 cable connections in other
configuration scenarios, see section Transmission Cable Connections in 3900 &
5900 Series Base Station Cables.
● The installation positions and routing of E1/T1 cables are the same in the
APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.E). This
section uses an APM30H (Ver.E) as an example.
● The installation positions and routing of E1/T1 cables are the same in the
APM5930(AC) and APM5930(DC). This section uses an APM5930(AC) as an
example.
● The E1/T1 cable on the SLPU side is routed along the left side of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector on the E1/T1 cable to an "OUTSIDE" port on
the UELP, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21
lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-313 Installing an E1/T1 cable in an APM30H (Ver.E)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-314 Installing an E1/T1 cable in an APM5930(AC)

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable bag
on the bottom left of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external
transmission equipment.
Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.4.3 Installing an FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an FE/GE surge
protection transfer cable.

Context
● The following shows how to install an FE/GE surge protection transfer cable in
a GL base station using the independent transmission mode. For the FE/GE
surge protection transfer cable connections in other configuration scenarios,
see section Transmission Cable Connections in 3900 & 5900 Series Base
Station Cables.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● The installation positions and routing of FE/GE surge protection transfer

cables are the same in the APM5930(AC) and APM5930(DC). This section
uses an APM5930(AC) as an example.
● The UMPTe/GTMUc has built-in surge protection circuits and does not require
any FE/GE surge protection transfer cable. If the BBU is configured with a
UMPTe/GTMUc, you can skip this section.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer
cable to the FE/GE port on the main control board, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-315 Installing an FE/GE surge protection transfer cable in an

APM5930(AC)

Step 2 Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the "FE0" or
"FE1" port near the "INSIDE" silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in the preceding
figure.

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1.14.4.4 Installing an FE/GE Ethernet Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an FE/GE
Ethernet cable.

Context
● An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.
● When the APM30H is stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L, ensure
that the ground clip has been moved from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L before installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.
● When the APM5930(AC) is stacked on a BBC5200D/BBC5200T/BBC5200D-L,
ensure that the ground clip has been moved from the APM5930(AC) to the
BBC5200D/BBC5200T/BBC5200D-L before installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.
● The following shows how to install FE/GE Ethernet cables in a GL base station
using the independent transmission mode. For the FE/GE Ethernet cable
connections in other configuration scenarios, see section Transmission Cable
Connections in 3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Cables.
● The installation positions and routing of FE/GE Ethernet cables are the same
in the APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H
(Ver.E). This section uses an APM30H (Ver.E) as an example.
● The installation positions and routing of FE/GE Ethernet cables are the same
in the APM5930(AC) and APM5930(DC). This section uses an APM5930(AC)
as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag or a cable outlet module
into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.
1. At a position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in an APM30H
(Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/APM5930 or within 1 m (3.28 ft) away from the
cable hole in an APM30H (Ver.C)/APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet, strip a length of 50
mm (1.97 in.) jacket off each FE/GE Ethernet cable to expose the shield layer.
2. Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through the ground clip and ensure that the
shield layer securely contacts with the ground clip. Then, tighten the M4 screw
to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-316 Installing a ground clip

Step 3 Install the FE/GE Ethernet cables.

● If a UMPTe/GTMUc is installed, connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable
to the "FE/GE0" or "FE/GE2" port on the UMPTe/GTMUc, as shown in the
following figure.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-317 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables in an APM30H (Ver.E) if a

UMPTe/GTMUc is installed

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-318 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables in an APM5930(AC) if a

UMPTe/GTMUc is installed

● If a transmission board other than UMPTe/GTMUc is installed, connect one

end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the "FE0" (or "FE/GE0") or "FE1" (or "FE/
GE1") port near the "OUTSIDE" silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in the
following figure.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-319 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables in an APM30H (Ver.E) if a

transmission board other than UMPTe/GTMUc is installed

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-320 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables in an APM5930(AC) if a

transmission board other than UMPTe/GTMUc is installed

Step 4 Connect the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the external transmission
equipment.
Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.4.5 Installing an FE/GE Optical Fiber

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an FE/GE
optical fiber.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
● Single-mode optical modules are labeled "SM" and multimode optical
modules are labeled "MM".
● The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a
multimode optical module is black or gray.
● An FE/GE optical fiber has an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC
connector at the other end.
● "SFP0" and "FE/GE0" ports on the LMPT in a BBU3900/BBU3910 are used for
one GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously.
● "SFP1" and "FE/GE1" ports on the LMPT in a BBU3900/BBU3910 are used for
one GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously.
● The installation positions and routing of FE/GE optical fibers are the same in
the APM5930(AC), APM5930(DC), APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
APM30H (Ver.D), and APM30H (Ver.E). This section uses an APM30H (Ver.E)
as an example.

NOTICE

● The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the

air for a long time. Therefore, keep the dustproof cap in the port of each
installed optical module plugged before you connect an optical fiber to the
optical module.
● CPRI optical fibers must be correctly connected in one time during the
installation. Otherwise, the RRU may malfunction, and cells may become
unusable.

NOTICE

Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
For example, the FE1 port (optical transmission port) on a GTMU/GTMUb/GTMUc
supports only the 100 Mbit/s transmission rate and therefore can only use an
optical module that supports hundreds of megabits per second. In this scenario, an
optical module that supports thousands of megabits per second may cause the
transmission link to be disconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module into the FE/GE, FE, SFP, or XGE port on the main control
board or transmission board, as shown in Figure 1-321 and Figure 1-322.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding optical port on the
corresponding board in the BBU.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTICE

After removing dustproof caps from the optical module and optical fiber
connector, insert the optical fiber into the optical module immediately (within
one minute) to avoid pollution of the optical module or optical fiber
connector, which may cause an optical module alarm.

2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.

3. Lower the puller of the optical module.
4. Insert the optical module into the optical port.
5. Raise the puller of the optical module.

Figure 1-321 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

Figure 1-322 Installing an optical module

Step 2 Install the optical fibers, as shown in Figure 1-323, Figure 1-324, and Figure
1-325.
1. Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the end labeled "2A" and
"2B" of the optical fibers, and insert the connectors into the optical module
on the BBU side.
2. Route the optical fibers out of the cable bag on the bottom right side of the
cabinet.
3. Connect the other end of the optical fibers to the external transmission
equipment.

NOTICE

The "TX" and "RX" ports (FE/GE optical ports) on the BBU must be connected
to the "RX" and "TX" ports on the transmission equipment, respectively.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-323 Removing the dustproof caps from the optical fiber

Figure 1-324 Installing FE/GE optical fibers in an APM30H (Ver.E)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-325 Installing FE/GE optical fibers in an APM5930(AC)

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.5 Installing Signal Cables

The signal cables need to be installed when a 19-inch rack is used include BBU
alarm cables, BBU interconnection signal cables, environment monitoring unit type
A (EMUA)/environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB) monitoring signal cables,
and GPS clock signal cables.

1.14.5.1 Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

This section describes the procedure for installing monitoring signal cables during
the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with one APM30H, one monitoring signal
cable must be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, as shown in the
following figure, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,

the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-326 1 APM30H expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the
"COM_IN" port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.
2. Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the
"MON1" port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Figure 1-327 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 2 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, install another CMUEA-
BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the
"COM_IN" port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of the added TMC11H.
2. Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the
"MON0" port on the UPEU in the BBU of the APM30H.

Figure 1-328 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.5.2 Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L and Its Expansion Scenario

This section describes the procedure for installing the monitoring signal cables
onsite during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L to 1
APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 BBC5200T-L.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
NOTE

● When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L, two monitoring

signal cables must be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L+1 TMC11H, as shown in
Figure 1-329, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the added
BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor other components.

Figure 1-329 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L expanded to 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L+1

TMC11H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-330 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

Step 2 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CMUH on the door of the BBC5200T-L.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_485" port
on the PMU in the APM30H.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-331 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the scenario of 1 APM30H+1

BBC5200T-L

Step 3 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 BBC5200T-L+1 TMC11H, another

CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connecting the APM30H and the added
TMC11H must be installed, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "MON0" port on the UPEU in the BBU of
the APM30H.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUEA in
the added TMC11H.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-332 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the scenario of 1 APM30H+1

BBC5200T-L+1 TMC11H

----End

1.14.5.3 Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L Cabinets and Its Expansion

Scenario
This section describes the procedure for installing the monitoring signal cables
onsite during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L cabinets
to 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L cabinets+1 TMC11H.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
NOTE

● When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L cabinets, three

monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L cabinets+1 TMC11H, as
shown in Figure 1-333, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the added
BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor other components.

Figure 1-333 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L cabinets expanded to 1 APM30H+2

BBC5200T-L cabinets+1 TMC11H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-334 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-335 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the scenario of 1 APM30H+1

BBC5200T-L

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUH modules in the two
BBC5200T-L cabinets, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_OUT" port on
the CMUH on the door of the BBC5200T-L below the APM30H.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port
on the CMUH on the door of the second BBC5200T-L.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-336 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the scenario of 1 APM30H+2

BBC5200T-L cabinets

Step 4 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 BBC5200T-L cabinets+1 TMC11H,

another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connecting the APM30H and the
added TMC11H must be installed, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "MON0" port on the UPEU in the BBU of
the APM30H.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUEA in
the added TMC11H.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-337 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the scenario of 1 APM30H+2

BBC5200T-L cabinets+1 TMC11H

----End

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1.14.5.4 Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 1 APM30H

+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
This section describes the procedure for installing the monitoring signal cables
during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T to 1
APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Context
NOTE

● When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T, two

monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, as
shown in Figure 1-338, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the added
BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor other components.

Figure 1-338 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 1 APM30H+1

IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-339 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the storage battery cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CMUEA on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_485" port
on the PMU in the APM30H.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-340 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T (2)

Step 3 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H,

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-341 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.5.5 Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 1

APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
This section describes the procedure for installing the monitoring signal cables
during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context
NOTE

● When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three

monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as
shown in Figure 1-342, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the added
BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor other components.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-342 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 1 APM30H+2

IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Figure 1-343 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-344 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T (2)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs in the two
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_OUT" port on
the CMUEA on the door of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the APM30H.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port
on the CMUEA on the door of the second IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-345 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (3)

Step 4 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H,

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-346 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

----End

1.14.5.6 Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts Expanded to 1

APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H
This section describes the procedure for installing the monitoring signal cables
during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts to 1
APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context
NOTE

● When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, three

monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, as
shown in Figure 1-347, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the added
BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor other components.

Figure 1-347 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts expanded to 1 APM30H+2

IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-348 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CCU01D-03 on the door of the IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the PMU in the
APM30H.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-349 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for CCU01D-03 modules between cascaded
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CCU01D-03 on
the door of the left IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the
CCU01D-03 on the door of the right IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-350 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Step 4 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H,

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-351 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H

----End

1.14.5.7 Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T Expanded to 1 APM30H

+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
This section describes the procedure for installing the monitoring signal cables
during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T to 1
APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Context
NOTE

● When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T, two

monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H, as
shown in Figure 1-352, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the added
BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor other components.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-352 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T expanded to 1 APM30H+1

IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H

Figure 1-353 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CMUEA on the door of the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_485" port
on the PMU in the APM30H.

Figure 1-354 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet

Step 3 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H,

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-355 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H

----End

1.14.5.8 (Optional) Installing BBU Interconnection Signal Cables

This section describes how to install a BBU interconnection signal cable for a
triple- or single-mode base station.

Prerequisites
● A BBU (which is optional) has been installed.
● Optical modules, optical fibers, and electrical cables meeting the following
requirements are available:
– The optical modules and optical fibers must be of the multimode type.
– Multimode optical modules on a UMPT or UCIU must meet the following
requirements:

▪ Supporting the rate of 4.9 Gbit/s in SRAN8.0 and earlier

▪ Supporting the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s in SRAN8.1 and later

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTE

Figure 1-356 Label on an optical module

(1) Maximum rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode

Context
The following table lists scenarios supporting the BBU interconnection and the
positions to which BBU interconnection signal cables are connected. For details
about scenarios supporting the BBU interconnection, see BBU Interconnection
Signal Cable Connections.

Table 1-53 Positions to which BBU interconnection signal cables are connected

Interconnectio Installation Position

n Mode
BBU 0 BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT "M0" port on the UCIU "CI" port on the UMPT

UCIU+UMPT "M1" port on the UCIU "CI" port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT "CI" port on the UMPT "CI" port on the UMPT

NOTICE

The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air

for more than 20 minutes. Therefore, insert an optical fiber into an unpacked
optical module within 20 minutes.

NOTE

● BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

● BBU interconnection through UMPT+UMPT is not supported by SRAN8.0 and earlier
versions and supported by SRAN8.1 and later versions.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Procedure
● Install one or two BBU interconnection signal cables connecting the UCIU and
the UMPT.
a. Remove the dustproof caps from the corresponding ports on the BBUs
and install the optical modules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the
following figure.
i. Lower the puller of the optical module.
ii. Insert the optical module into the port.
iii. Raise the puller of the optical module.

Figure 1-357 Installing the optical module

b. Remove the dustproof caps from connectors on the optical fibers, as

shown in Figure 1-358.

Figure 1-358 Removing the dustproof caps from the optical fiber

c. Install one or two BBU interconnection signal cables connecting the UCIU
and the UMPT. The following figure shows the installation of two BBU
interconnection signal cables.
NOTE

● You need to install two BBU interconnection signal cables connecting the UCIU
and the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
● You need to install only one BBU interconnection signal cable connecting the UCIU
and the UMPT in GU+L or GL+U mode.

i. Connect one end of the cables to the "M0" and "M1" ports on the
UCIU in BBU 0.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

ii. Connect the other end of the cables to the "CI" ports on the UMPT_U
and UMPT_L in BBU 1.
● Install the interconnection signal cables between the UMPTs in BBU 0 and the
UMPTs in BBU 1.
– (Optional) Install SFP+ cables.
i. Connect the end with the "Master" color-coding label of each cable
to the "CI" port on BBU 0 and connect the other end of each cable to
the "CI" port on BBU 1.
– (Optional) Install CPRI single-fiber bidirectional optical fibers.
i. Install optical modules, as shown in Figure 1-359 and Figure 1-360.
○ Remove the dustproof caps from the "CI" ports on the main
control boards in BBU 0. Lower the pullers of the optical
modules with the blue puller. Insert the optical modules into the
"CI" ports on the main control boards in BBU 0, and raise the
pullers of the optical modules.
○ Remove the dustproof caps from the "CI" ports on the main
control boards in BBU 1. Lower the pullers of the optical
modules with the purple puller. Insert the optical modules into
the ports on the main control boards in BBU 1, and raise the
pullers of the optical modules.

Figure 1-359 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

Figure 1-360 Installing an optical module

ii. Remove the dustproof cap from the LC connector labeled 2A.
iii. Separate the DLC connector into two LC connectors. Insert the LC
connector labeled 2A into the optical module on the UMPT board in
one BBU, as shown in the following figure. Insert the LC connector
labeled 1A into the optical module on the UMPT board in the other
BBU.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-361 Installing a CPRI single-fiber bidirectional optical fiber

Figure 1-362 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-363 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS3900/BTS3900L

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-364 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS5900L/ILC29

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-365 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS5900/APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E)/INS12

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-366 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in

an APM5930

● Install the interconnection signal cables between the UMPTs in BBU 0 and the
UMPTs in BBU 1.
– (Optional) Install SFP+ cables.
i. Connect the end with the "Master" color-coding label of each cable
to the "CI" port on BBU 0 and connect the other end of each cable to
the "CI" port on BBU 1.
– (Optional) Install CPRI single-fiber bidirectional optical fibers.
i. Install optical modules, as shown in Figure 1-367 and Figure 1-368.
○ Remove the dustproof caps from the "CI" ports on the main
control boards in BBU 0. Lower the pullers of the optical
modules with the blue puller. Insert the optical modules into the
"CI" ports on the main control boards in BBU 0, and raise the
pullers of the optical modules.
○ Remove the dustproof caps from the "CI" ports on the main
control boards in BBU 1. Lower the pullers of the optical
modules with the purple puller. Insert the optical modules into
the ports on the main control boards in BBU 1, and raise the
pullers of the optical modules.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-367 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

Figure 1-368 Installing an optical module

Figure 1-369 Installing a CPRI single-fiber bidirectional optical fiber

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-370 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT)

Figure 1-371 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS3900/BTS3900L

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-372 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS5900L/ILC29

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-373 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS5900/APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E)/INS12

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-374 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in

an APM5930

● Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling

Requirements.
● Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-
Shaped Label.
----End

1.14.5.9 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable

A BBU alarm cable transmits the alarm signals from the external alarm equipment
to the BBU.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the BBU alarm cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the BBU alarm cable to the "EXT-
ALM0" or "EXT-ALM1" port on the UPEU in the BBU.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the BBU alarm cable to the
external alarm equipment.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-375 Installing a BBU alarm cable

Step 2 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 3 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.5.10 Installing an ODM06D Surge Protection Alarm Cable

An ODM06D surge protection alarm cable transmits alarm information about the
surge protector in an ODM06D to a central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA).

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare an ODM06D surge protection alarm cable.
1. Cut off the RJ45 connectors at both ends of the ODM06D surge protection
alarm cable, and cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Strip the jacket of 7 mm (0.28 in.) off the ODM06D surge protection alarm
cable at both ends, cut off three exposed twisted pairs, and reserve one
twisted pair.

NOTICE

When stripping the jacket off a twisted pair to expose the shield layer, do not
scratch the insulation layer of wires in the twisted pair.

Step 2 Install the ODM06D surge protection alarm cable, a shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the bare wires at one end of the ODM06D surge protection alarm
cable to the "IN0" port on the CMUEA in the APM30H.
2. Connect the bare wires at the other end of the ODM06D surge protection
alarm cable to the surge protector in the ODM06D.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-376 Installing an ODM06D surge protection alarm cable

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.14.6 Installing CPRI Optical Fibers for 12 or Fewer RRUs

This section describes the procedure for installing CPRI optical fibers, which
transmit CPRI signals between a BBU and RRUs.

Context
NOTE

● Single-mode optical modules are labeled "SM" and multimode optical modules are
labeled "MM".
● The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode
optical module is black or gray.
● Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
● For details about the CPRI optical fiber connections, see section "CPRI Cable
Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
● A large quantity of optical fibers are required in certain scenarios, so you are advised to
adopt the solution for routing 1-to-12 fiber optic bundles using LC connectors when an
ODF is used. Figure 1-377 shows the detailed routes.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-377 Routes of optical fibers

a. Traditional solution for routing optical fibers b. Solution for routing 1-to-12 fiber optic
bundles using LC connectors

NOTICE

● The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the

NOTICE

When installing a single-fiber bidirectional optical fiber for the RRU3804 or

RRU3806, pay attention to the following:
● The single-fiber bidirectional optical module must be used in pairs. Therefore,
the single-fiber bidirectional optical modules used in the BBU must match
those used in the RRUs.
● The rate of a single-fiber bidirectional optical module supported by the single-
fiber bidirectional optical fiber is 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.
● Before installing an optical fiber, split the DLC connector at each side into two
LC connectors, and connect only one LC connector at each end of the optical
fiber. The other LC connector at each end of the optical fiber can be left
unused on the equipment side or cut off.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 1-378 and Figure
1-379.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the "CPRI" port on the main control board
(for example, GTMU) or baseband processing unit (for example, WBBP) in the
BBU.
2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.
3. (Optional) For the optical module with a puller, lower the puller. For the
optical module with a handle, skip this step.
4. Insert the optical module into the "CPRI" port on the main control board (for
example, GTMU) or baseband processing unit (for example, WBBP).
5. (Optional) For the optical module with a puller, raise the puller. For the
optical module with a handle, skip this step.

Figure 1-378 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

Figure 1-379 Installing an optical module

Step 2 Optional: Install a CPRI optical fiber for a two-fiber bidirectional optical module.

NOTICE

● When a CPRI optical fiber connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on
the BBU side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) long and the breakout cables on the RRU side
are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) long, respectively.
● If an LC-LC optical fiber is used, the "TX" port on the BBU must be connected to
the "RX" port on the RRU and the "RX" port on the BBU must be connected to
the "TX" port on the RRU.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1. Remove the dustproof caps from connectors on the optical fiber.

2. Insert the DLC connector labeled 2A and 2B of the CPRI optical fiber into the
optical module on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP/UBRI/UBBP board, as shown in the
following figure. Insert the DLC connector labeled 1A and 1B into the optical
module of the RRU.

Figure 1-380 Installing a CPRI optical fiber for a two-fiber bidirectional

optical module

Step 3 Optional: Install a CPRI optical fiber for a single-fiber bidirectional optical module.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the LC connector labeled 2A.
2. Split the DLC connector into two LC connectors, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-381 Splitting a DLC connector into two LC connectors

3. Install the optical fiber.

Insert the LC connector labeled 2A into the single-fiber bidirectional optical
module on the LBBP/UBBP, as shown in the following figure. Insert the LC
connector labeled 1A into the optical module of the RRU.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-382 Inserting an LC connector into a single-fiber bidirectional optical

module

Step 4 Route the CPRI optical fibers along the left side of the cabinet through the cable
bag on the bottom left side of the cabinet, and connect the cables to the
corresponding RRUs.

Figure 1-383 Installing CPRI optical fibers

Step 5 Install the optical module on the RRU/AAU side.

● For a common optical module, install the optical module of the same type as
the BBU side on the RRU/AAU side and insert the end labeled "1A" and "1B"
of the fiber optic cable to the optical module on the RRU side. For details
about how to install optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the RRU
side, see the related RRU installation guide.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTICE

– Optical modules with the same label are of the same type.
– When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU/AAU, the
breakout cables on the BBU side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) long and the
breakout cables on the RRU/AAU side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) long,
respectively.
– If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the "TX" port on the BBU must be
connected to the "RX" port on the RF module and the "RX" port on the
BBU must be connected to the "TX" port on the RF module.

● For a 100 Gbit/s BIDI optical module, install the optical module with a dark
green handle on the AAU side, and connect the end labeled "1A" on the fiber
optic cable to the optical module on the AAU side. For details about how to
install optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the AAU side, see the
related AAU installation guide.
Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.14.7 Installing CPRI Optical Fibers for More Than 12 RRUs

A CPRI optical fiber transmits CPRI signals between a BBU and an RRU.

Context
NOTE

● Single-mode optical modules are labeled "SM" and multimode optical modules are
labeled "MM".
● The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode
optical module is black or gray.
● Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
● For details about the CPRI optical fiber connections, see section "CPRI Cable
Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
● When 12 or fewer RRUs are configured, you can use CPRI fiber optic cables to connect a
BBU to the RRUs by following the instructions in 1.14.6 Installing CPRI Optical Fibers
for 12 or Fewer RRUs.

NOTICE

● The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

NOTICE

When installing a single-fiber bidirectional optical fiber for the RRU3804 or

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 1-384 and Figure
1-385.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the "CPRI" port on the main control board
(for example, GTMU) or baseband processing unit (for example, WBBP) in the
BBU.
2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.
3. (Optional) For the optical module with a puller, lower the puller. For the
optical module with a handle, skip this step.
4. Insert the optical module into the "CPRI" port on the main control board (for
example, GTMU) or baseband processing unit (for example, WBBP).
5. (Optional) For the optical module with a puller, raise the puller. For the
optical module with a handle, skip this step.

Figure 1-384 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-385 Installing an optical module

Step 2 Lay out the LC connectors on the 12 CPRI fiber optic cables in sequence and wrap
the CPRI fiber optic cables with winding pipes, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Use winding pipes to protect the heads of the fiber optic cables and then use the tape to wrap
the fiber optic cables so that the protective caps are secured.

Figure 1-386 Wrapping a CPRI optical fiber with the winding pipe

Step 3 Route the OFD trunk optical fiber into the cabinet through the cable bag on the
left side of the cabinet, and remove the winding pipe after the trunk optical fiber
is routed into the cabinet.
Step 4 Install the OFD trunk optical fiber on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 1-387,
Figure 1-388 and Figure 1-389.
1. Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the ends labeled "0A",
"0B", "2A", "2B", "3A", "3B", "4A", "4B", "5A", and "5B" on the fiber optic
cables.
2. Insert the connectors into the optical modules installed in the BBU.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-387 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables (dual-fiber bidirectional optical
modules)

Figure 1-388 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables (single-fiber bidirectional optical
modules)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-389 Installing a CPRI optical fiber

NOTE

Route the fiber optical cables through the PG connector for the OFD06 one by one.

Step 5 Install the OFD trunk optical fiber on the OFD06 side.
1. Open the cover plate for the OFD06, remove the M20 PG connector from the
cable hole on the right side of the OFD06, and remove the rubber plug inside,
as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-390 Removing a rubber plug

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

2. Insert the optical fiber into the PG connector and the removed rubber plug,
and route the optical fiber through the cable hole on the right side.
3. Insert the six DLC connectors on the trunk optical fiber into the six SFP ports
facing upwards in the case, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

If the optical fiber in the case is excessively long, wind the optical fiber for some circles
to ensure the convenient connection between the optical fiber and port.

Figure 1-391 Installing a trunk optical fiber

4. Remove the M32 PG connectors in the two cable holes on the left side and
remove the rubber plugs inside.
5. Route the three breakout fiber optic cables through the PG connectors, pull
apart the holes in the rubber plug, and insert the breakout fiber optic cables
into the holes, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-392 Routing cables through the holes in the rubber plug

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

6. Insert the two rubber plugs into the two cable holes on the left side of the
case.
7. Insert the six DLC connectors on the breakout fiber optic cables into the six
SFP ports facing downwards in the case, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

If the optical fiber in the case is excessively long, wind the optical fiber for some circles
to ensure the convenient connection between the optical fiber and port.

Figure 1-393 Installing the breakout fiber optic cables

8. Use cable ties to bind the trunk optical fiber with a diameter of 7.5 mm (0.30
in.) onto the cable trough in the case, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE

Do not bind any trunk fiber optic cables with a diameter of 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
or any pigtails. Otherwise, fiber optic cables may be broken with great force.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-394 Binding the optical fiber

(1) Cable trough

9. Tighten the PG connectors in the three cable holes at the bottom of the case.
NOTE

Do not drag the pigtails when tightening the PG connectors.

10. Close the cover plate for the OFD06 and use a Torx screwdriver to tighten the
six T20 anti-theft screws on the cover plate to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-395 Closing the cover plate for an OFD06

Step 6 On the RRU side, install the same type of optical modules as those on the BBU
side. Insert the end labeled "1A" and "1B" of each optical fiber to the optical
module on the RRU side. For details about how to install the optical modules and
CPRI fiber optic cables on the RRU side, see the related RRU installation guide.
Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.14.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 8 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.
----End

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1.15 Installation Checklist

This section describes how to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cables after the installation is complete.

Cabinet Installation Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the cabinet installation.

Table 1-54 Cabinet installation checklist

No. Item

1 The cabinet is located at the correct position according to the

engineering drawing.

2 The base is securely installed.

3 All the bolts, especially those for electrical connections, are tightened.
No flat washer or spring washer is missing, and flat washers and
spring washers are installed in the correct sequence.

4 The cabinet is clean, and dust and dirt are cleaned in a timely
manner.

5 The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired to

prevent corrosion.

6 Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.

7 Unused slots of the BBU are configured with filler panels.

NOTICE

Filler panels must be correctly installed in vacant BBU slots to ensure proper heat
dissipation. Otherwise, normal operation and service life of boards will be affected.

Installation Environment Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the installation environment.

Table 1-55 Installation environment checklist

No. Item

1 No excessive cable ties or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.

2 No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around
the cabinet.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

No. Item

3 Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.

Electrical Connection Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for electrical connections.

Table 1-56 Electrical connection checklist

No. Item

1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core

diameters. There should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding
system. No short circuit is allowed.

2 The ground cable is securely connected and the AC lead-in cable and
cables in the cabinet are correctly connected according to the
electrical design of the power system. The screws are tightened. The
input and output cables are not short-circuited.

3 The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off
instead of coiled up.

4 The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are
securely soldered or crimped.

5 The bare wires and the terminal handles of the wiring terminals are
coated with heat shrink tubings.

6 The flat washers and spring washers are well mounted on all OT
terminals. The contact surfaces on the OT terminals are not
deformed. The OT terminals are securely and properly connected.

7 The exterior of the lithium/storage battery is intact without any

scratch, dent, or crack.

8 The shell of the lithium/storage battery is clean without any leakage

trace.

9 The wiring terminal on the storage battery stands properly without

any damage, and the post is not covered with any acid substances.

10 The pressure relief valve of the battery is not transformed, and no

liquid leaks.

11 Power cables for lithium/storage batteries are connected to the

positive and negative electrodes correctly.

12 The voltage of the battery is normal.

● 2 V storage battery: 1.8 V to 2.35 V
● 12 V storage battery: 10.8 V to 14.1 V
● Overall voltage of the lithium/storage batteries: 43.2 V to 56.4 V

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

No. Item

13 The circuit breakers of the lithium/storage batteries are turned off.

14 Before powering on the DCDU, ensure that the two sides of the
power cable for a load such as an RRU or a BBU are correctly
connected to the positive and negative terminals on the modules.
Reverse connections or short circuits may trigger the upper-level
protector for the DCDU after the DCDU is powered on.

Cable Installation Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the cable installation.

Table 1-57 Cable installation checklist

No. Item

1 All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are

securely connected. All cable connectors, especially those at the
bottom of the cabinet, are securely installed.

2 All cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly
spaced and face the same direction.

3 Different types of cables, such as the power cables, PGND cables,

feeders, optical cables, E1/T1 signal cables, and FE/GE signal cables,
are separately bound.

4 The layout of all cables must facilitate the maintenance and capacity
expansion. For example, the local maintenance adapter must be
bound to a BBU cable claw and oriented outwards, as shown in the
following figure.

5 The labels at both ends of a cable are legible (labels are attached).

6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut
surfaces are smooth without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm
to 5 mm (0.11 in. to 0.19 in.) of the outdoor cable ties is reserved
when the cable ties are cut.

7 All vacant ports are properly protected. For example, unused CPRI
ports on BBU boards are protected using dust-proof caps.

8 The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid poor contact

that will cause an abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).

NOTICE

Ensure that the PMID/PMIU is securely installed and the PMID-CCUC/PMIU-CCUB

monitoring signal cable is securely connected. Otherwise, the lithium/storage
batteries may be damaged during discharge.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-396 Checking the local maintenance adapter

1.16 Powering On a Base Station

This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the
power supply to the components in a cabinet.

Prerequisites
● Input power cables for the DBS site are correctly connected.
● The power supply to the DBS site meets the requirements of the power
system.
● External power supply to the DBS site has been shut off.
● All circuit breakers in the APM30H are turned off.
● All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDU in the TMC11H are turned off.
● All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the BBC5200D-L/
BB5200T-L/IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T/IBBS700D/IBBS700T
(referred to as the lithium/storage battery cabinet) are turned off.
● The circuit breaker on the BBU has been turned off.
● Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Context

NOTICE

● Power on a cabinet or case-structured BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If

you power off a cabinet or BBU case for maintenance purposes, restore power
to the cabinet or BBU case within 48 hours.
● Power on a BBU3910A/BBU3910C/BBU5900A within 24 hours after unpacking
it. If you power it off for maintenance purposes, restore power to it within 24
hours.
● Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU
for maintenance purposes, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.
● Power on an IBBS20D within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off an
IBBS20D for maintenance, restore power to the IBBS20D within 48 hours.
● Power on an IBBS20L within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an
IBBS20L for maintenance, restore power to the IBBS20L within 24 hours.

Table 1-58 Circuit breakers at a DBS site

Cabinet Power Devicea Circuit Breaker
Type

APM30H EPS 01A/EPS 01C, ● Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A/EPS 01C
(Ver.B) DCDU-01, ● "BAT_SW0", "BAT_SW1", and "FAN/
series DCDU-03B, TEC_SW2" circuit breakers on the power
cabinet DCDU-03C, or power distribution box in the storage battery
distribution box cabinet
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control
the power input to RRU 0 to RRU 5,
BBU, fan assembly, and customer
transmission equipment.)
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control
the power input to the BBU, fan
assembly, and customer transmission
equipment.)

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Cabinet Power Devicea Circuit Breaker

Type

APM30H EPU03A-02/04, ● Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02/04

(Ver.C) DCDU-11A, ● "BAT_SW0", "BAT_SW1", and "FAN/
series DCDU-11B, TEC_SW2" circuit breakers on the power
cabinet DCDU-11C, and distribution box in the storage battery
power distribution cabinet
box
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11B ("SW0" to "SW9" circuit
breakers control the power input to RRU
0 to RRU 5, BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/
EMUB, and FAN 02B.)
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11C ("SW0" to "SW5" circuit
breakers control the power input to the
transmission equipment. "SW6" to
"SW9" circuit breakers control the power
input to BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/
EMUB, and FAN 02B.)

APM30H EPU05A-02/04, ● Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02/04

(Ver.D) DCDU-12A, ● "BAT_SW0" and "BAT_SW1" circuit
series DCDU-12B, breakers on the power distribution box
cabinet DCDU-12C, in the storage battery cabinet
DCDU16D, EPU02D,
EPU02D-02, EPU02B,
EPU02S, and power
distribution box

APM30H EPU05A-07/09, ● Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-07/09

(Ver.E) DCDU-12B, ● "BAT" circuit breaker on the power
series DCDU16D, EPU02D, distribution box in the lithium/storage
cabinet EPU02D-02, EPU02B, battery cabinet
EPU02S, and power
distribution box

a: In this section, EPU05A-02/04, EPU03A-02/04, and EPU05A-07/09 are

shortened to EPU, EPS 01A/01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model
is shortened to DCDU.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-59 Circuit breakers at a DBS site

Cabinet Power Devicea Circuit Breaker
Type

APM30H EPU05A-07/09, ● Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-07/09

(Ver.E) DCDU-12B, ● "BAT" circuit breaker on the power
series DCDU16D, EPU02D, distribution box in the lithium/storage
cabinet EPU02D-02, EPU02B, battery cabinet
EPU02S, and power
distribution box

a: In this section, EPU05A-02/04, EPU03A-02/04, and EPU05A-07/09 are

shortened to EPU, EPS 01A/01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model
is shortened to DCDU.

NOTE

The EPU02B, EPU02D, EPU02D-02, EPU02S-02, and EPU02S are used to provide voltage
boosting power distribution for high-power RRUs. The procedures for powering on a DCDU and
an EPU02B, EPU02D, EPU02D-02, EPU02S-02, and EPU02S are the same. This section describes
the procedure for powering on a DCDU as an example.

Process
The following figure shows the power-on check process.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-397 Power-on check process

Procedure
Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the input/output terminal
and the ground, and ensure that there is no short circuit.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Step 2 Optional: If a site is configured with lithium/storage battery cabinets, turn on the
"BAT" circuit breaker on the EPU/EPS and circuit breakers on the power
distribution box in the lithium/storage battery cabinets. Otherwise, skip this step.
Step 3 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and storage
battery cabinet.
Step 4 Turn on all the circuit breakers with loads on the EPU/EPS, and check the power
supply status of each component according to the following table.

DANGER

● Before the power-on operation, check that all power cables are correctly
connected. Any reverse power cable connection or short circuit of the positive
and negative poles may cause damage to equipment or unexpected injuries of
human body.
● Exercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves high
voltage operations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact
with the input voltage using a damp object may be fatal.

Table 1-60 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU/EPS

Cabinet Componen Normal Power Supply Status
t

APM30H PMU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and
off for 0.125s, or on for 1s and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

PSU ● The power indicator is steady green.

● The fault indicator is steady off.

Fan ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and

assembly off for 0.125s, or on for 1s and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

Fan in the The fan is working properly.

front door

Lithium/ Fan or TEC The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the
Storage in the front RUN indicator on the CMUA/CMUE/CMUEA/CMUH/
battery door CCU01D-03 is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
cabinet 0.125s, or on for 1s and off for 1s).

Step 5 Optional: Turn on all circuit breakers with loads on each DCDU in the TMC11H.
Skip this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the DCDU-12B/
12C.
Step 6 Turn on the power circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU.
Step 7 Check the power supply status of each component according to the following
table.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Table 1-61 Normal status of components in each cabinet

Cabinet Componen Normal Power Supply Status
t

APM30H/ BBU ● UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.

TMC11H ● FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).
● Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off
for 1s). The CPRI indicator is not steady reda.

- RRU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and

off for 0.125s, or on for 1s and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

a: If the indicator indicating the status of the CPRI port is steady red, check
whether the optical module is faulty or the optical fiber is broken.

NOTE

The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators,
see BBU Hardware Description.

Step 8 Check the connections of BBU5900 power cables. For the video of powering on a
BBU5900 using two groups of power cables, see Powering On a BBU5900 Using
Two Groups of Power Cables.
1. Remove one connector on a BBU power cable from the power equipment and
check whether the power supply of the BBU is normal.
2. Reinstall the connector removed in Step 8.1, and remove another connector
on the other BBU power cable from the power equipment. Then, check
whether the power supply of the BBU is normal.
3. Ensure that two BBU power cables are properly connected. Then, reinstall the
connector removed in Step 8.2.
Step 9 Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered
on, handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.

Table 1-62 Troubleshooting

Failure Type Handling Measure

Failure in the power Check whether the power cables are connected correctly:
supply to all ● If the cables are incorrectly connected, turn off all
components in the circuit breakers, and then reconnect the power cables.
cabinet
● If the cables are connected correctly, replace the
power device.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Failure Type Handling Measure

Failure in the power Perform the following operations:

supply to a board in 1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
the BBU slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.
Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the
status of indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the
board, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards
of the same type, and check the status of the
indicators.
– If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
– If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.

Failure in the power Perform the following operations:

supply to other 1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal
components in the block that connects power supply to the component
cabinet is on. Skip this step and go to step b if this
component does not use any fuse terminal block.
– If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on,
the fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse by
following the instructions in Replacing a Fuse in an
EPU05A or DCDU.
– If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off,
go to step b.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the
component.
– If the input power is normal, replace the
component.
– If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is securely
connected. If the power cable is not connected
securely, turn off the circuit breaker for the
component (if there is no circuit breaker for the
component, remove the connector on the power
cable) and reconnect the power cable. If the
power cable is connected securely, the circuit
breaker or fuse for the component may be faulty.
In this case, replace the circuit breaker or fuse.

----End

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

1.17 Follow-up Procedure

This section describes the operations that need to be performed after the
installation, which include sealing the cable outlets on the base of the cabinet and
repainting the cabinet.

1.17.1 Sealing Cable Outlets

After all installation procedures are complete, seal cable outlets of the cabinets
and bases.

Procedure
● Sealing cable outlets of a cabinet
a. Route cables through the cable bags and pull the drawstrings to fasten
the bags around the cables, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

● All cables must be bound to the cable bridges on one side of the cabinet.
● You can put your hands in the cable bag to route cables through the bag.
● The following figure describes the method of fastening cable bags in an
APM30H. The same method is used for fastening the cable bags in other
types of cabinets.

Figure 1-398 Fastening the cable bags

● Sealing cable outlets on a base for an APM30H/TMC11H/BBC5200T-L/

IBBS200D/IBBS200T/RFC
a. Use a baffle plate to block the redundant space in the cable outlet and
tighten the two screws and two butterfly nuts on each baffle plate to 1.2
N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-399 Using baffle plates to seal cable outlets of a base

(1) Baffle plate on the left (2) Baffle plate on the right (3) Baffle plate at the rear

b. Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE

If the ambient temperature is low, use a heat gun to heat the fireproof mud for
convenient sealing.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-400 Using fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base

(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe

c. Tighten the three screws on the front cover plate of the base to 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf·in.) and close the front cover plate.
● Sealing cable outlets on a base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T
a. Use a baffle plate to block the redundant space in the cable outlet and
tighten the two screws and two butterfly nuts on each baffle plate to 4.8
N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-401 Using baffle plates to seal cable outlets of a base

(1) Baffle plate on the right (2) Baffle plate at the rear (3) Baffle plate on the left

b. Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE

If the ambient temperature is low, use a heat gun to heat the fireproof mud for
convenient sealing.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-402 Using fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base

(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe

c. Tighten the three screws on the front cover plate of the base to 4.8 N·m
(42.48 lbf·in.) and close the front cover plate.
● Sealing cable outlets on a base for an IBBS700D/IBBS700T
a. Use baffle plates to block the redundant space in the cable outlets, as
shown in the following figure.
b. Install the front cover plate for the base. Tighten the three M6
countersunk screws on the front cover plate to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.).

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-403 Sealing the cable outlets on the base for an IBBS700D/
IBBS700T

(1) PVC corrugated pipe (2) Baffle plate (3) Front cover plate

----End

1.17.2 Repainting
The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Any damaged paint
must be repaired to prevent corrosion.

Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to the
following table.

Table 1-63 Color codes

Intended Color Huawei Code International Code
Object

Cabinet RAL7035 YB026 RAL7035

Base 3010 light gray YB030 Pantone 422U

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, slightly
rub the area with sandpaper to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-404 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper

Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or
dust from the rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with
another clean cloth, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-405 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol

Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.

Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the
paint. Then apply the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be
observed, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE

Ensure that the paint coating is thin and even and paint drops are prohibited on
the coating to keep the surface smooth.

APM30H (Ver.D)
Installation Guide 1 APM30H (Ver.D) Installation Guide

Figure 1-406 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet

Step 5 Perform the subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating has been
exposed in the air for about 30 minutes.
NOTE

The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the
surrounding areas, without obvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no
longer be distinguishable. In addition, there should be no paint peeled off.

----End

APM30H (Ver.C) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
APM30H (Ver.C) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
209 pages
APM5930 (DC) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
APM5930 (DC) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
303 pages
User Manual - Fiplex Compact Repeaters
No ratings yet
User Manual - Fiplex Compact Repeaters
26 pages
MERLIN GERIN LVCircuitBreakers11to3200A PDF
100% (1)
MERLIN GERIN LVCircuitBreakers11to3200A PDF
169 pages
Installing Cygwin 64 Bit With Moshell 22
No ratings yet
Installing Cygwin 64 Bit With Moshell 22
13 pages
BTS3900AL Hardware Description (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900AL Hardware Description (03) (PDF) - EN
20 pages
Comandos Navigator
No ratings yet
Comandos Navigator
11 pages
EMUB User Guide
No ratings yet
EMUB User Guide
58 pages
AP1 Receivables 2
100% (1)
AP1 Receivables 2
17 pages
EMU Alarm Setting - XL Project-1
No ratings yet
EMU Alarm Setting - XL Project-1
14 pages
Huawei 2G BTS Fault Guide
50% (2)
Huawei 2G BTS Fault Guide
7 pages
TP48300B & TP48600B Maintenance Guide (V100R001 - 02)
0% (1)
TP48300B & TP48600B Maintenance Guide (V100R001 - 02)
44 pages
CS-IMF 880.1-960 RJ 869-879 40dB DC: 27/03/2015 Sala E15V87P55
No ratings yet
CS-IMF 880.1-960 RJ 869-879 40dB DC: 27/03/2015 Sala E15V87P55
3 pages
RTN 320 V100 Quick Installation Guide 02
No ratings yet
RTN 320 V100 Quick Installation Guide 02
37 pages
Quidway S9300 Product Description
No ratings yet
Quidway S9300 Product Description
108 pages
ANT - DUAL-AQU4518R24v06-1964-001 Datasheet (2L2H)
No ratings yet
ANT - DUAL-AQU4518R24v06-1964-001 Datasheet (2L2H)
2 pages
Install Radio 8863
No ratings yet
Install Radio 8863
41 pages
BTS3900 GSM Hardware Description - (V300R008&009 - 03)
100% (1)
BTS3900 GSM Hardware Description - (V300R008&009 - 03)
143 pages
Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas
No ratings yet
Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas
3 pages
ALM-21814 BSS Internal Voice Channel Abnormal
100% (1)
ALM-21814 BSS Internal Voice Channel Abnormal
2 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
175 pages
5.2 Intermediate Frequency Board - IsM8 Board
No ratings yet
5.2 Intermediate Frequency Board - IsM8 Board
133 pages
ANT-AQU4518R24v18-4351 Datasheet
No ratings yet
ANT-AQU4518R24v18-4351 Datasheet
3 pages
260 - Ceragon - XPIC - Presentation v1.2
No ratings yet
260 - Ceragon - XPIC - Presentation v1.2
28 pages
RRU3838 Technical Specifications (V100R016C10 - 01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
RRU3838 Technical Specifications (V100R016C10 - 01) (PDF) - EN
13 pages
Newtec MDM5010 Satellite Modem Datasheet
No ratings yet
Newtec MDM5010 Satellite Modem Datasheet
2 pages
NetEngine 8000 X4X8 V800R022C00 Upgrade Guide
No ratings yet
NetEngine 8000 X4X8 V800R022C00 Upgrade Guide
104 pages
Antenna Specifications Electrical Properties
No ratings yet
Antenna Specifications Electrical Properties
2 pages
RTN 620 Product Description (V100R003 - 07)
100% (8)
RTN 620 Product Description (V100R003 - 07)
122 pages
RRU3908 V2 Hardware Description (V100 - 06) (PDF) - en
100% (1)
RRU3908 V2 Hardware Description (V100 - 06) (PDF) - en
40 pages
Below Is The Flow Chart of XPD Tuning
No ratings yet
Below Is The Flow Chart of XPD Tuning
5 pages
SJ-20151105160201-004-ZXMW NR8950 (V2.04.02) Hardware Installation Guide
100% (1)
SJ-20151105160201-004-ZXMW NR8950 (V2.04.02) Hardware Installation Guide
95 pages
DRFU and DTRU Training
No ratings yet
DRFU and DTRU Training
44 pages
APM100 Outdoor Power Supply System User Manual (V1.3)
No ratings yet
APM100 Outdoor Power Supply System User Manual (V1.3)
58 pages
TQBM 609016 172718 182018 252718dei 65FT2
No ratings yet
TQBM 609016 172718 182018 252718dei 65FT2
2 pages
AAU3910 Installation Guide (11) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
AAU3910 Installation Guide (11) (PDF) - en
91 pages
OptiX Metro 100 User Manual
No ratings yet
OptiX Metro 100 User Manual
310 pages
Antenna Schemes 290607
No ratings yet
Antenna Schemes 290607
10 pages
RTN Alarms Description PDF
No ratings yet
RTN Alarms Description PDF
8 pages
RTN 910 Brochure
No ratings yet
RTN 910 Brochure
2 pages
Huawei Bbu3900 Lte FDD Tda 2014 Toc
No ratings yet
Huawei Bbu3900 Lte FDD Tda 2014 Toc
5 pages
SIAE Microelectronic
No ratings yet
SIAE Microelectronic
6 pages
BTS3012
No ratings yet
BTS3012
90 pages
Marconi LH MDRS 155 EC - System Description 19.06.2006
100% (2)
Marconi LH MDRS 155 EC - System Description 19.06.2006
60 pages
PNMTj-5000s Operation
100% (1)
PNMTj-5000s Operation
83 pages
BBU Interconnection (SRAN12.1 03)
No ratings yet
BBU Interconnection (SRAN12.1 03)
61 pages
BBU3900 Hardware Description (V100 - 03)
100% (2)
BBU3900 Hardware Description (V100 - 03)
81 pages
BTS 3900 Family
No ratings yet
BTS 3900 Family
23 pages
Dbs3900 Dcu Spare Parts Catalog
No ratings yet
Dbs3900 Dcu Spare Parts Catalog
41 pages
OptiX PTN 1900 Hardware Description - (V100R002C01 04)
No ratings yet
OptiX PTN 1900 Hardware Description - (V100R002C01 04)
218 pages
Huawei APM30H User Guide V100R004C02
No ratings yet
Huawei APM30H User Guide V100R004C02
133 pages
APM30 User Guide (V100R004C01 - 04)
100% (1)
APM30 User Guide (V100R004C01 - 04)
205 pages
APM30 User Guide (V200R301 - 01)
100% (1)
APM30 User Guide (V200R301 - 01)
203 pages
Apm30h User Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Apm30h User Guide PDF
181 pages
Apm30 User Guide - (v200r303 - 03)
No ratings yet
Apm30 User Guide - (v200r303 - 03)
181 pages
APM30H BBC Slolution V2
No ratings yet
APM30H BBC Slolution V2
29 pages
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&T User Guide - (V200R303 - 05) PDF
No ratings yet
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&T User Guide - (V200R303 - 05) PDF
197 pages
APM30H Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
APM30H Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
36 pages
Product Description: APM30H (Ver.C)
No ratings yet
Product Description: APM30H (Ver.C)
70 pages
NE05E&NE08E V300R003C10SPC500 Installation Guide PDF
No ratings yet
NE05E&NE08E V300R003C10SPC500 Installation Guide PDF
118 pages
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.B) User Guide (V200R303 - 07) - 20101109-B-1.0 PDF
No ratings yet
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.B) User Guide (V200R303 - 07) - 20101109-B-1.0 PDF
218 pages
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Installation Guide (12) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Installation Guide (12) (PDF) - en
275 pages
IBBS20L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IBBS20L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
11 pages
IBBS&BBC Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IBBS&BBC Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (03) (PDF) - EN
334 pages
HAAU5323 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
HAAU5323 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
67 pages
HAAU5222 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
HAAU5222 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
74 pages
IBBS Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (02) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IBBS Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (02) (PDF) - EN
209 pages
AAU5636 (2300-2600 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5636 (2300-2600 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
79 pages
AAU5639 (2300 MHZ) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5639 (2300 MHZ) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
81 pages
AAU5636w (3500-3700 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5636w (3500-3700 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
82 pages
AAU5613 Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5613 Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
68 pages
HAAU5213 Hardware Description (Draft C) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
HAAU5213 Hardware Description (Draft C) (PDF) - EN
17 pages
AAU5271 Hardware Description (10) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5271 Hardware Description (10) (PDF) - EN
22 pages
AAU5310 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5310 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
20 pages
BTS3900C WCDMA Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900C WCDMA Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
39 pages
AAU5636 Hardware Description (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5636 Hardware Description (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
18 pages
INS05 Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
INS05 Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN
64 pages
Installation Guide For Cabinet Capacity Expansion (Draft) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
Installation Guide For Cabinet Capacity Expansion (Draft) (PDF) - EN
92 pages
AAU5631 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5631 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
19 pages
BBC5200D-L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BBC5200D-L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
11 pages
IMB05 Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IMB05 Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
148 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
169 pages
IFS5906 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IFS5906 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
178 pages
IMS5906 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IMS5906 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
10 pages
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
155 pages
BTS3900C (Ver.C) Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900C (Ver.C) Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
98 pages
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
277 pages
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide (14) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide (14) (PDF) - EN
502 pages
Project Topics For Computer Science
No ratings yet
Project Topics For Computer Science
6 pages
Handling and Retention of BA and BE Testing Samples 1711545083
No ratings yet
Handling and Retention of BA and BE Testing Samples 1711545083
22 pages
Department of Education: Community Engagement, Solidarity and Citizenship
No ratings yet
Department of Education: Community Engagement, Solidarity and Citizenship
3 pages
Pran Group MIS Report
No ratings yet
Pran Group MIS Report
14 pages
Worksheet Classification1
No ratings yet
Worksheet Classification1
15 pages
Water Sector Development Programme Phase II: The United Republic of Tanzania
No ratings yet
Water Sector Development Programme Phase II: The United Republic of Tanzania
106 pages
Organizing Your Binder Portfolio
No ratings yet
Organizing Your Binder Portfolio
18 pages
Methods of Testing Glassfibre Reinforced Concrete (GRC) Material
No ratings yet
Methods of Testing Glassfibre Reinforced Concrete (GRC) Material
20 pages
Module 2 Worksheet 4
No ratings yet
Module 2 Worksheet 4
2 pages
Ambulance Job Description
No ratings yet
Ambulance Job Description
5 pages
Kemper v. Skywest Airlines, Inc. - Document No. 5
No ratings yet
Kemper v. Skywest Airlines, Inc. - Document No. 5
3 pages
Luvis Chair Brochure V4-1
No ratings yet
Luvis Chair Brochure V4-1
12 pages
The Way We Thunk (Keith A Pearson)
No ratings yet
The Way We Thunk (Keith A Pearson)
341 pages
Contract of Sale of Goods
No ratings yet
Contract of Sale of Goods
11 pages
Chapter 1 - Introduction To Business
No ratings yet
Chapter 1 - Introduction To Business
33 pages
Types of Communication
No ratings yet
Types of Communication
32 pages
Tease Me - Chaka Demus & Pliers (1993)
No ratings yet
Tease Me - Chaka Demus & Pliers (1993)
1 page
Join Ordering in Fragment Queries: Approach I: Ordering Joins Without Using Semi-Joins
No ratings yet
Join Ordering in Fragment Queries: Approach I: Ordering Joins Without Using Semi-Joins
7 pages
Session2 AI Intelligence Knowledge
No ratings yet
Session2 AI Intelligence Knowledge
19 pages
Pre-sales Intern - Yucollect - Delhi
No ratings yet
Pre-sales Intern - Yucollect - Delhi
1 page
SC 12-15 - METALLON GOLD ZIMBABWE V GOLDEN MILLION (PVT) LIMITED
No ratings yet
SC 12-15 - METALLON GOLD ZIMBABWE V GOLDEN MILLION (PVT) LIMITED
8 pages
BS 1139-1.2-1990
67% (3)
BS 1139-1.2-1990
9 pages
Pradip Bhalekar
No ratings yet
Pradip Bhalekar
11 pages
MR Aviation Turbine Fuel (Def Stan 91 91 Issue 6)
No ratings yet
MR Aviation Turbine Fuel (Def Stan 91 91 Issue 6)
4 pages
FSG Project Overview
No ratings yet
FSG Project Overview
29 pages
FIN MAR MODULE 2 and Ass.
No ratings yet
FIN MAR MODULE 2 and Ass.
28 pages
National Conference Onncst2014 Edited-2
No ratings yet
National Conference Onncst2014 Edited-2
6 pages
Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM)
No ratings yet
Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM)
25 pages